JP6078123B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[PROBLEMS] To improve the interest of games. After a special game state is finished, it is possible to perform control so that a specific game state in which a normal variation prize-winning device 37 can be opened is set for a predetermined period. Further, it is possible to control the first special variable winning device 38 to be converted to the open state based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the game that won the first special variable winning device 38. Control is performed so that a special gaming state is generated based on the ball flowing into the specific area. Then, the specific game state is started based on the end of the special game state, and is controlled to end based on the end of the variable display game first started after the end of the special game state. [Selection] Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a game area where game balls can flow down and game control means for controlling a game.

  In a conventional gaming machine, two types of games, a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, can be executed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-099315 A

  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a limit in providing new game characteristics. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine comprising a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and a game control means for controlling the game,
In the gaming area,
Start prize opening where game balls can win,
An ordinary variable winning device, a first special variable winning device, and a second special variable winning device that are convertible between a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won,
The normal variation winning device is arranged at a position where a winning can be achieved by firing a game ball to the right of the gaming area,
The first special variation winning device includes a specific area into which a game ball can flow,
The game control means includes
A first start storage means capable of storing a random number value extracted based on winning in the start winning opening as a first start memory that has a right to execute the first variable display game up to a predetermined number;
A second starting storage means capable of storing a random number value extracted based on winning in the normal variable winning device as a second starting memory that has a right to execute a second variable display game up to a predetermined number;
First variation display game execution means for executing the first variation display game based on the first start memory;
Second variation display game execution means for executing the second variation display game based on the second start memory;
A normal variation for controlling the normal variation winning device to be converted to an open state when a third variation display game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the third variation display game is a predetermined result. Winning device control means;
First special variable winning device control means capable of converting the first special variable winning device into an open state when at least the result of the second variable display game is a specific result;
At least when the result of the first variation display game is a special result or when a game ball that has won the first special variation winning device flows into the specific area, the second special variation winning device is opened. Special game state generating means for controlling to generate a special game state to be converted into,
After the special gaming state is finished, it is possible to control to set a specific gaming state that can open the normal variation winning device over a predetermined period,
Controlling the specific gaming state to start based on the end of the special gaming state, and to end based on the end of the first variable display game that is first started after the end of the special gaming state;
The result of the second variable display game executed on the basis of the second start-up memory does not include an outage ,
The predetermined result is not included in the result of the third variable display game started at a time other than the specific gaming state .

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 1st distribution device and the 2nd distribution device. It is a figure explaining the structure of a collective display apparatus. It is a figure explaining transition of various probabilities and game states. It is a time chart explaining the flow of a game. It is a time chart explaining the flow of a game. It is a time chart explaining the flow of a game. It is a time chart explaining the flow of a game. It is a figure explaining the effect of a game. It is a figure explaining the effect of a game. It is a figure explaining the effect of a game. It is a figure explaining a common figure pattern. It is a figure explaining a common figure pattern. It is a figure explaining the effect of a game. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a residual sphere error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a residual sphere error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining an illegal sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an error check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a starter switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining starter switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a lower great prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a specific area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an electric support change frequency update process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit release pre-process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit release process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a lower large winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable time prefetch process. It is a flowchart explaining a lower university winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud check process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal drawing effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a figure explaining transition of the production mode in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining transition of the production mode in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the information determination process in pending | holding in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining interruption of the game in the 2nd modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the various probabilities and game state in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the accessory game process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific area switch monitoring process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the accessory normal process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the 3rd modification. It is a time chart explaining the execution aspect of the special figure change display game in the specific game state in the 4th modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image. For example, a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning holes 35 are arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 16).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 16).

  A first distribution device 90 is provided on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The first distribution device 90 has an internal space formed by a cover member covering the front and partition walls provided on the left and right sides, and a game ball can flow down in the internal space. The cover member is transparent or translucent so that the player can visually recognize the behavior of the game ball. The upper part of the first distribution device 90 is provided with an inlet 90a through which game balls flow into the internal space, and the lower part of the first distribution device 90 is open so that the game balls can flow downward from the internal space. It has become. In the game area 32 above the inflow port 90a, game nails are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the inflow port 90a, and all of the game balls launched into the right game area 32 flow into the inflow port 90a. It is like that.

  A first distribution member 91 that distributes the inflowing game balls to the left and right is provided directly below the inflow port 90a. As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the first distribution member 91 is a member that can rotate around a rotation shaft 91a along the front-rear direction. Of the three arm portions extending along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 91a from the position where the rotation shaft 91a is arranged, the arm portion 91b extending upward is adjacent to the arm portion 91b. A first holding portion 91e that temporarily holds a game ball is formed by the arm portion 91c extending to the left, and on the right side of the arm portion 91b extending upward, a right adjacent to the arm portion 91b is formed. A second holding portion 91f that temporarily holds the game ball is formed by the arm portion 91d extending in the direction. In the distribution member 91, the first holding portion 91e can receive the game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a as shown in FIG. 3A with the arm portion 91b extending upward always facing upward. As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the second holding portion 91f can be rotated between the correct position and a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first holding portion 91e is in a position where it can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the second holding portion 91f has caused the game ball to flow down to the right. It becomes a state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the second holding portion 91f is in a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received, the first holding portion 91e flows down toward the left. It will be in the state that was let.

  In such a first distribution member 91, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a is in an acceptable state toward the inflow port 90a of the first holding portion 91e and the second holding portion 91f. It is held by the holding part. When the game ball is held by one holding unit, the first sorting member 91 rotates in the direction of the holding unit due to the weight of the game ball, and the held game ball moves in the direction in which the holding unit rotates. Flow down.

  That is, when the game ball that has flowed in by the second holding portion 91f is received, the first sorting member 91 rotates to the right by the weight of the game ball as shown in FIG. After the guidance, the first holding unit 91e stops in a state where the next game ball can be received. When the game ball that has flowed in at the first holding portion 91e is received, the first sorting member 91 rotates to the left by the weight of the game ball as shown in FIG. After the guidance, the second holding portion 91f stops in a state where the next game ball can be received.

  In the internal space of the first sorting device 90, a game variable display game is provided at a position where the game ball received by the first holding portion 91e and guided to the left by the first sorting member 91 flows down. A normal start gate 34 for providing the start conditions is provided. A game ball that has passed through the normal start gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 16). Further, below the normal start gate 34 and below the first distribution device 90, there is provided an ordinary variable winning device 37 (start winning port, start winning region) for giving a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game. It has been.

  The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right with the lower end as a center. As shown in FIG. 3 (a), a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) that is normally in a vertical state and in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the general-purpose fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 16) as a driving device rotates the game as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 (b). It is changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 16).

  In a state where the movable member 37b is opened, the game ball guided to the left by the first distribution member 91 and passed through the normal start gate 34 is received by the opened movable member 37b and is normally changed. Winning 37. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, it flows downward without winning the normal variation winning device 37. Further, the game ball guided to the right by the first distribution member 91 flows out from the internal space and flows downward. In other words, the game ball launched into the game area 32 on the right side passes through the normal start gate 34 by the first distribution device 90 and passes through the normal start gate 34 in a direction in which it can win the normal variation winning device 37. Without any change, the game is alternately distributed to the normal variation winning device 37 in a direction in which no winning is possible.

  Returning to FIG. 2, a second distribution device 92 is provided at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Similar to the first distribution device 90, the second distribution device 92 has an internal space formed by a cover member that covers the front and partition walls provided on the left and right sides, and the game balls flow down in the internal space. It is possible. The cover member is transparent or translucent so that the player can visually recognize the behavior of the game ball. An inlet 92a through which a game ball flows into the internal space is provided at the upper part of the second distribution device 92, and the lower half of the left partition of the second distribution device 92 is open so that the game ball is inside. It can flow out from the space to the lower left. In the game area 32 above the inflow port 92a, game nails are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the inflow port 92a, and a part of the game balls launched to the right game area 32 is directed to the inflow port 92a. Inflow.

  A second distribution member 93 that distributes the inflowing game balls to the left and right is provided directly below the inflow port 92a. As shown in FIGS. 3C and 3D, the second distribution member 93 is a member that can rotate around a rotation shaft 93a along the front-rear direction. Of the three arm portions extending along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 93a from the position where the rotation shaft 93a is arranged, the arm portion 93b extending upward is adjacent to the arm portion 93b. A first holding portion 93e that temporarily holds a game ball is formed by the arm portion 93c extending to the left, and on the right side of the arm portion 93b extending upward, a right adjacent to the arm portion 93b is formed. A second holding portion 93f that temporarily holds the game ball is formed by the arm portion 93d extending in the direction. In the distribution member 93, the first holding portion 93e can receive the game ball flowing into the inflow port 92a as shown in FIG. 3C with the arm portion 93b extending upward always facing upward. As shown in FIG. 3 (d), the second holding portion 93f can be rotated between a position where the game ball flowing into the inflow port 92a can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 3C, when the first holding portion 93e is in a position where it can receive the game ball flowing into the inflow port 92a, the second holding portion 93f has caused the game ball to flow down to the right. It becomes a state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3D, when the second holding portion 93f is in a position where it can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 92a, the first holding portion 93e flows down toward the left. It will be in the state that was let.

  In such a second distribution member 93, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 92 a is in a state where it can be received toward the inflow port 92 a among the first holding unit 93 e and the second holding unit 93 f. It is held by the holding part. When the game ball is held by one holding unit, the second sorting member 93 rotates in the direction of the holding unit due to the weight of the game ball, and the held game ball moves in the direction in which the holding unit rotates. Flow down.

  That is, when the game ball that has flowed in by the second holding portion 93f is received, the second sorting member 93 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball as shown in FIG. After the guidance, the first holding unit 93e stops in a state where the next game ball can be received. When the game ball that has flowed in at the first holding portion 93e is received, the second sorting member 93 rotates to the left by the weight of the game ball as shown in FIG. After the guidance, the second holding portion 93f stops in a state where the next game ball can be received.

  A third start prize that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game is provided at the position where the game ball guided to the right by the second distribution member 93 flows in the internal space of the second distribution device 92. A mouth 48 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) is provided. A game ball won in the third start winning port 48 is detected by the start port 3 switch 48a (see FIG. 16). In addition, the game ball guided to the left by the first distribution member 91 flows out of the internal space and flows down to the lower left. That is, a part of the game balls launched into the game area 32 on the right side can be won by the second distribution device 92 in the third start winning opening 48 and in the direction in which the third start winning opening 48 cannot be won. And can be distributed alternately.

  Returning to FIG. 2, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable winning device (upper size) that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. (Winning opening) 38 is arranged. The first special variation winning device 38 includes an open / close door 38c that can be converted into a state in which the upper surface slides backward to open and the game ball can easily flow.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has a plate-shaped opening / closing door 38c that can slide in the front-rear direction at the top, and closed the top prize winning opening depending on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state (blocked state unfavorable for the player) is changed to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 16) as a driving device. During the small hit game state based on the small hit of the display game, the game ball can easily flow into the upper prize winning opening by converting the upper prize winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined The game value (prize ball) is given.

  An upper prize port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 16) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). . In addition, a specific area into which the game ball can flow is provided inside the upper prize winning opening, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 16) is used to change the flow probability of the game ball into the specific area. An operating lever member is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 16) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and a special game state is generated as a big hit based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d. It is supposed to be. The game balls that have flowed into the specific area are discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

  In addition, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 16) for detecting a game ball that is discharged from the upper University winning port without flowing into the specific area is provided inside the upper University winning port. The number of game balls inflow detected by the top prize winning port switch 38a matches the number of game balls to be discharged detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e so that the games in the top prize winning mouth It can be confirmed that all the balls have been discharged, and basically, the new top prize opening is not opened until this confirmation is completed. The upper prize winning opening is provided with an illegal ball switch 38g that detects a game ball staying above a specific area inside the upper prize winning opening. Thus, for example, a fraudulent act in which a thread fishing ball stays above a specific area in the upper prize winning opening, flows into the specific area when a small hit occurs, is detected by the specific area switch 38d, and illegally obtains a big hit Can be found.

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the first start winning opening 36, a second special that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (lower prize winning port) 39 is provided.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big prize opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 16) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. Makes it easier for the game ball to flow into the lower game winning opening by converting the lower game winning opening from the closed state to the opened state, and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing.

  A lower major prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 16) is provided inside the lower major prize opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower major prize opening. Yes. Also, below the second special variable winning device 39, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or it may be shifted to the left and right and only a part may overlap vertically. Further, the open / close doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the above-described formats, and may be other formats.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the first start winning opening 36 or the general winning opening 35 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and the right game area By launching the game ball to the right (so-called right-handed), it becomes possible to aim for winning in the ordinary start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the third starting winning port 48. ing. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed regardless of whether the game ball is fired in the left or right game area.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and a batch of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure fluctuation display section) composed of a 7 segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 display for special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) and start memory number notification of special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamp Storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14).

  In addition, the collective display device 50 has a round display section 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is opened and closed). The first game state display unit 76 (D9, D17) for notifying whether there is a second, which is a second for notifying the player of the left strike (normal strike) and the right strike, which is advantageous to the player (the strike method corresponding to the game state) A gaming state display section 77 (D8) is provided. Further, the collective display device 50 includes a general map display 74 (D10, D18) for a general variable display game, and a general map storage display unit 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the start memory number of the general variable display game. Is provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. ), A plurality of LEDs are turned off and turned on (flashing). The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state or the small hit game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and in the special game state or the small hit as shown in FIG. During the gaming state, the LED is turned on in accordance with the number of rounds selected according to the result. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the first gaming state display unit 76 turns on the LED when there is a high probability of ordinary figure (while supporting ordinary electricity), and when the probability of ordinary figure is low (no ordinary electricity support). Turns off the LED. As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the second gaming state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the gaming state is more advantageous for the player to the left than the right strike (normal strike). In a gaming state where it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike, the LED is turned on.

  In the general map change display game in the general map display 74, the change symbol number shown in FIG. 4 (g) is alternately changed and the two LEDs are alternately lit during the variable display of the general map display game. Display that it is changing. When the result is a win, the two LEDs are turned on to indicate that the hit is true, and when the result is not correct, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that they are off. The general map storage display unit 75 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of passing balls of the general map start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general map display 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the display is made by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, wins the normal variable winning device 37, the third start winning port 48, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 The game area 32 is discharged. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, the third starting winning opening 48, the first special variable winning apparatus 38, or the second special variable winning apparatus 39, the winning is won. The number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 16) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  The winning balls to the first starting winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 48 are detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 3 switch 48a provided inside as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as the first start memory. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the third starting winning opening 48 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the start right is generated. Accordingly, the first start memory is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory is started. The stored number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended or is in a special gaming state In addition, when a game ball wins in the first start winning slot 36 or the third start winning slot 48, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is incremented by 1 and the first start memory becomes 1. Will be remembered. When the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  The winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning in the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been entered. In addition, even if a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37, the second start memory is not generated. Note that, when a win is made to the normal variation winning device 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is generated once for convenience of processing, but the second start memory is immediately stored. Therefore, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated.

  Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 16). Is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the start display number storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration start memory display.

  The game control device 100 uses the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display) based on the winning at the first starting winning opening 36, the winning at the third starting winning opening 48 or the already stored first starting memory. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game is played on the apparatus), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is played on the special figure 2 display 52 (second fluctuation display apparatus) based on the winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time. While one of the special figure fluctuation display games is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as an interruption or a result other than the special result (outlier result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display form as shown in FIG. 4B, the predetermined result form is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (a big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and it becomes a special gaming state (so-called big hit state).

  In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, a special result form (small hit result form) in which the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes a small hit gaming state (so-called small hit state). In this embodiment, the small hit occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game. When a game ball flows into a specific area of the first special variable winning device 38 in this small hit game state, it becomes a big hit (V big hit) and a special game state is entered.

  That is, the first figure 51 display 51 can display the first variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the third starting winning opening 48. It serves as a variable display means. The special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second fluctuation display means capable of displaying a second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on the winning of a game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41. The special figure variation display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game includes a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Is displayed. Then, a variation display is performed in accordance with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special diagram variation display game.

  That is, the display device 41 displays a decoration variation display game in which the decoration identification information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) ( A decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration special map variation display game) is provided. The decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game, and the display device 41 also has the first fluctuation based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening 36 or the third starting winning opening 48. The first variation display means capable of displaying the display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 It can also be said that it constitutes a displayable second variation display means. It should be noted that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they may be simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when there is no distinction between the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, they may be simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game.

  FIG. 5A shows the specifications of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The jackpot probability is 1/100 for both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Further, the small hit occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game and is 99/100. In the lottery for the big hit and the small hit, the big hit and the small hit do not overlap. Therefore, in the special figure 2 variable display game, either the big hit or the small win is surely won. In addition, you may make it become a loss result.

  The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. 2 It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable prize-winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning. From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special gaming state (special gaming state) and the game value that can be given to the player than the first special gaming state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate a low second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) is included.

  When a game ball wins the first special variation winning device 38, the probability that the game ball flows into the specific area (V area) is about 1/3. There are three types of jackpot types: one 16R electric support, no 16R electric support, and one 2R electric support. The 16R electric support once is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the normal electric power support state is maintained until one special figure 1 variable display game ends after the special game state ends. “Without 16R electric support” is a big hit where the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the normal electric power support state is not established after the special game state ends. One 2R electric support is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and after the special game state ends, one special figure 1 variable display game ends until the general electric power support state ends. As shown in FIG. 5A, the distribution probability of the big hit type in the case of the big hit is different between the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

  In addition, the normal figure probability, which is the probability of winning the normal variation display game, is 0 in a low probability state (a state that is not a general power support state), and 17/251 in a high probability state (a general power support state). . That is, the game ball can be awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 only in the ordinary power support state.

  FIG. 5B shows the transition of the gaming state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the normal game state ST1, there is no support for ordinary electric power and no winning in the normal variation winning device 37 occurs. Therefore, the game is played with a left-handed game ball to the left game area 32, and the first starting prize opening The game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the winning of 36. And when a big hit occurs, it will be in the special game state ST2. In this special game state ST2, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. In the special game state ST2, an instruction is given to aim at winning the second special variable winning device 39 by right-handed, but it is possible to aim at winning the second special variable winning device 39 even by left-handed.

  When the big hit type is no ordinary power support, after the special game state ST2 is finished, the game returns to the normal game state ST1. In addition, when the big hit type is with ordinary power support, the game proceeds to the specific gaming state ST3. In the specific game state ST3, since there is a general electric power support, it is possible to win the normal variation winning device 37, and the game proceeds with a right-hand hit. This specific game state ST3 is continued until one special figure variation display game is completed.

  When the big hit type is normal power support and becomes the specific game state ST3, the change time of the first special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the special game state ST2 is 30 to 1800 seconds. Is set. Therefore, a fixed time is secured as the execution time of the specific game state ST3. Note that when the special figure variation display game is started after the special game state ST2 is finished, the process related to the special figure 1 variation display game is performed before the process related to the special figure 2 variation display game. If there is a display game start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game is started first. Even if there is no start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game, a game ball is won at the third start winning opening 48 by the second sorting device 92 by making a right turn. The time from the start of the right hand until the game ball is won at the third start winning opening 48 is the normal variable winning device 37 is released through the normal variation display game from the start of the right hand and the game is played to the normal variable winning device 37. It is shorter than the time until the ball wins, and after the special game state ST2 ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started first. The specific game state ST3 is continued until one special figure 1 variable display game is completed, and even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started first after the special game state is ended, The specific game state ST3 may not be ended when the display game is ended.

  And during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, and the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is either big hit or small hit. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the game proceeds to the special game state ST2. In this case, the currently running special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped even if the fluctuation time remains. In the case of a big win in the special figure 2 variable display game, only 16R electric support is selected as the big hit type, so after the special game state ST2 is over, the specific game state ST3 is entered again.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the small hit gaming state ST4 is set. In the small hit game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the game is played with a right hand. When the small hit game state ST4 is reached, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, and the variable time is not reduced. If the game ball does not win the first special variable winning device 38, or if it has won the first special variable winning device 38 but has not flowed into the specific area (V winning), it returns to the specific gaming state ST3, The suspended special figure 1 variable display game is resumed.

  Further, if the game ball wins the first special variation winning device 38 and flows into the specific area (V winning), it becomes a big hit and the special gaming state ST2 is entered. In this case, the currently running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly discontinued and stopped with the result. In this case, the jackpot type is also selected as one 16R electric support, but since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for the first round, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened for 15 rounds. After the end of the special game state ST2, the specific game state ST3 is entered again.

  When the game ball wins the first special variable winning device 38, the probability of flowing into the specific area is about 1/3, so that it is considered that the game ball may not win the first special variable winning device 38. For example, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special game state ST2 and the specific game state ST3 loop with a probability lower than 1/3. If the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific game state ST3 is large, the probability that the special game state ST2 and the specific game state ST3 loop will increase, but the number of executions increases as the execution time of the specific game state ST3 increases. Become. Since the execution period of the specific game state ST3 depends on the change time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the longer the change time of the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific game state ST3, the more advantageous the state for the player.

  Also, if the execution time (variation time + stop time) of the special figure 1 variable display game has elapsed in the specific gaming state ST3 and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of date, the specific gaming state ST3 ends. Transition to the normal gaming state ST1. At this time, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the process shifts to the special game state ST2.

  FIG. 6 shows an example in which a big hit of one 16R electric support occurs in the normal gaming state. In addition, the code | symbol (a)-(i) described in the lower stage respond | corresponds to (a)-(i) of FIG. 10, FIG. In this example, the special figure 1 variation display game is started based on the first start memory in a state where there are three first start memories (t11). Accordingly, the first start memory number becomes 2. During the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 and detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a, whereby the first start memory becomes 3 (t12).

  This special figure 1 variable display game is out of results, and when the variable time ends and the stop time for displaying the result has elapsed, the next special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory (t13). ). This special figure 1 fluctuation display game results in a big hit of one 16R electric support, and when the fluctuation time ends and the stop time for displaying the result elapses, the special game state is entered (t14).

  In the special game state, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened for 16 rounds. Also, here, the player plays a game by hitting right, and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 34a when the game ball passes through the general diagram start gate 34, and based on this, the general variation display game is executed. ing. During the special game state, the normal game probability is low and the game won't win, so the results of the normal game variable display game are all out of place and the normal variable winning device 37 is not released. Further, by making a right-hand hit, a game ball is won at the third start winning opening 48 and detected by the start opening 3 switch 48a, and the first start memory number reaches the upper limit of 4.

  When the special game state ends, the specific game state is entered (t15). When the special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory, and the specific game state is set until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game. In this specific gaming state, the probability of a normal figure becomes a high probability state, and it is possible to derive a win as a result of a normal figure fluctuation display game. If the big hit type is no 16R electric support, the special game state is not entered and the normal game state is entered after the special game state ends. In this case, the normal figure probability remains in a low probability state.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of a game in a specific game state. In addition, the code | symbol (g)-(l) described in the lower stage respond | corresponds to (g)-(l) of FIG. 10, FIG. Here, the first special figure 1 variable display game started after the end of the special game state is being executed, and the specific game state continues. Further, the normal start memory is 0, and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 34a when the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, and the normal start memory is generated (t21). Based on this normal map start memory, the normal map change display game is started (t22).

  In this normal variation display game, the result is a win, and when the variation time ends and the stop time for displaying the result elapses, the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (t23). ~ T26). Then, when a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 in the open state and is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (t24), the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t25).

  In this special figure 2 variable display game, the result is a small hit, and when the variable time ends and the stop time for displaying the result elapses, the small hit gaming state is started (t28). In this small hit gaming state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. Here, no game balls have been won in the first special variable winning device 38, and when the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38 ends and a predetermined time for performing the remaining ball processing or the like has elapsed, the small hit gaming state becomes. The process ends (t29). Also, the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state of being interrupted from the small hit derivation (t27) to the end of the small hit gaming state (t29). In this interrupted state, the change time is not subtracted. Then, when the small hit gaming state is ended, the special figure 1 variable display game which has been interrupted is resumed (t29).

  It should be noted that, in the specific gaming state, the game ball does not win the first special variation winning device 38 in this way, or even if the game ball wins the first special variation winning device 38, it does not flow into the specific area. In the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as a result of the loss and the specific gaming state is ended, the normal gaming state is entered. With the end of the specific gaming state, the normal probability becomes a low probability state, and the normal variation winning device 37 is not released.

  FIG. 8 also shows an example of the game in the specific game state. In addition, the code | symbol (g)-(s) described in the lower stage respond | corresponds to (q)-(s) of FIG. 10, (g)-(p) of FIG. 11, FIG. The process from t21 to t28 is the same as t21 to t28 in FIG. Here, in the small hit gaming state, the game ball wins the first special variation winning device 38, and further flows into the specific area and is detected by the specific area switch 38d (t50). Thereby, the special gaming state is started with the end of the small hit gaming state (t51).

  The big hit type when a game ball flows into a specific area is 16R electric support once, but since the first special variable winning device 38 is released in the first round in the small hit gaming state, 2 Opening of the special variable winning device 39 starts from the second round. As described above, in the special game state, the normal figure probability is low and the game is not likely to win. Therefore, the results of the normal figure fluctuation display game are all out of place and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is not released (for example, t51-t54).

  In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted by derivation of the small hit (t27), and is forcibly stopped by the result of the disengagement at the end of the special game state (t55). The timing at which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped is determined from the detection of the game ball (t50) by the specific area switch 38d in which the occurrence of the special game state is confirmed (t55) to the end of the special game state (t55). If it is between. However, a new special figure 1 variable display game is not started until the end of the special game state (t55).

  When the special game state ends, the specific game state is entered (t55). When the special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory, and the specific game state is set until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game. In this specific gaming state, the probability of a normal figure becomes a high probability state, and it is possible to derive a win as a result of a normal figure fluctuation display game. In this special figure 1 variable display game, the stop display time elapses when the special figure 1 variable display game, which has been interrupted with the end of the specific gaming state (t55), is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment. (T56).

  As described above, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is started after the stop display time from the start of the special gaming state, the new special figure 2 variable display game is started after the normal variable winning device 37 is released (t57). Since the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is sufficiently early, the first special figure variable display game started in the specific gaming state is the special figure 1 variable display game. Even if there is no first start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game based on the winning at the third start winning port 48 starts earlier than the special figure 2 variable display game starts, so it is started in the specific gaming state. The first special figure fluctuation display game is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  FIG. 9 shows the operation in the small hit gaming state. The special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (t71), and when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the result of the small hit is derived (t72), The running special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. The special figure 1 variable display game is suspended until the end of the small hit gaming state (t78).

  When the stop time (600 ms) for displaying the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is over, the small hit gaming state is started (t73). In the small hit gaming state, when the fanfare time (300 ms) has elapsed from the start (t73), the first special variable winning device 38 is released (t74). The first special variable winning device 38 is closed when a predetermined time (1600 ms) elapses (t76).

  The specific area switch 38d is activated when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t74). The state where the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state where the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as being effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the specific area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid. That is, the big hit based on the inflow to the specific area occurs only when the game ball flows into the specific area with the specific area switch 38d being effective.

  The specific area switch 38d is a period in which a small hit remaining ball process, which is a process related to a game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 but has not yet been discharged after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, is performed. The state is valid for (3000 ms + α), and invalidated when the small hit remaining ball processing is completed and the small hit gaming state is completed (t78).

  The lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member that changes the inflow probability of the game ball to the specific area is turned on when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t74), and is turned off after a predetermined time (380 ms). (T75). The period during which the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state is 2840 ms, during which the first special variable winning device 38 is closed. The state in which the lever member is not operating due to the lever solenoid 38f being turned off is a state in which the game ball is more likely to flow into the specific area than the state in which the lever member is operating due to the lever solenoid 38f being turned on. That is, a game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is released has a low probability of flowing into the specific area.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned on again in the second half of the small hit remaining ball processing after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t77), and turned off after 1760 ms elapses (t78). If there is no remaining ball, the small hit remaining ball processing ends here and the small hit gaming state ends. If there is a remaining sphere, the operation of turning on 2840 ms and then turning off 1760 ms is repeated until all the remaining spheres are discharged, and the small hit remaining sphere processing is continued. By operating the lever member in the small hit remaining ball processing, the game balls remaining in the first special variable winning device 38 are surely discharged.

  10 and 11 show examples of display on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the normal game state, a game mode display unit 80 for displaying the game state is provided in the upper right part of the display area. Here, “normal mode” indicating that the game is in the normal game state is displayed. In the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. In addition, the display of “↓” indicates that the display is fluctuating.

  In the upper right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, ○ and × are used as identification information, and these are alternately displayed in the variable display, and after that, when the result is a win, ○ is stopped, and × is stopped and displayed, the decorative special figure 2 is changed. Display the display game.

  A storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided at the lower part of the display area. The decoration start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order, and here, there are two first start memories. The decoration start memory display at the left end is a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest and notify the result of pre-reading such as the special figure 1 variation display game and variation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode (color, shape, etc.) of the corresponding decor start memory display. is there.

  On the left side of the display area at the bottom of the display area, a running memory display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure 1 variable display game is provided. In the in-execution memory display portion 84, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the memory display portion 83 is shifted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. Is suggested by the display mode. Furthermore, a first start memory number display section 85 indicating the current first start memory number is provided at the lower right of the display area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit of one 16R electric support, and after the reach state occurs as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the result is derived and shown to be a big hit. Further, along with the derivation of the big hit result, a right-handed instruction display 86 for notifying that right-handed is advantageous for the player is made.

  During the special game state, the number of rounds and the big hit round effect are displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, a big hit result display 87 showing the big hit result is displayed. Here, it is shown that “7” is a big hit, that is, a big hit of one 16R electric support.

  When the special gaming state ends, the specific gaming state is entered. At the start of the specific gaming state, the start effects shown in FIGS. 10 (e) and 10 (f) are performed. In this start effect, a notification display 88 indicating that “peach peach RUSH”, which is an effect mode in the specific gaming state, is started, and a duration display 89 indicating the duration of the specific gaming state is made. Here, the display imitating an hourglass indicates that the duration is 5 minutes. This duration is the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during the small hit, the actual duration is longer than the time displayed at this time. The duration display 89 is displayed until the end of the specific gaming state, and the player displays the remaining time by performing a display in which the sand of the duration display 89 imitating an hourglass falls as time passes. We are trying to grasp it.

  After the start effect is finished, the effect is in the specific gaming state. In the effect during the specific game state, the effect that the river flows is displayed. Then, when the universal map display game is started, an effect is produced in which peaches flow from the upstream of the river as shown in FIG. 10 (g), and an effect in which the character breaks peaches as shown in FIG. 10 (h). .

  When the result of the normal variation display game is out of play, an effect is produced in which only smoke is produced from the broken peach as shown in FIG. In addition, when the result of the normal variation display game is a win, as shown in FIG. 11 (j), an effect that the character “open” appears from the broken peach is performed, and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened. As will be described later, the fluctuation time of the usual figure display game is set for each period obtained by dividing the period of the specific game state into a plurality of periods, and the peach begins to flow as shown in FIG. From time to time, as shown in FIG. 11 (i) or (j), the time until the effect that the peach breaks is made to coincide with the fluctuation time of the usual fluctuation display game set in each period.

  When the game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 and the special figure 2 variable display game is started, an effect that the color of peach changes as shown in FIG. Indicates that it is running. In addition, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 performs variable display. Then, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and a small hit game state, as shown in FIG. 11 (l), the peach is further enlarged and the characters "small" appear. It is shown that the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during the small hit game state, the operation of the duration display 89 is stopped. In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is indicated that the character “Large” appears and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

  If the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the small hit gaming state generated when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the display returns to the display of FIG. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is resumed, the operation of the duration display 89 is resumed. In addition, when a game ball flows into a specific area in the small hit game state, as shown in FIG. 11 (m), there is an effect that the letter “V” appears from the peach, and the special game state flows into the specific area. An effect is provided to notify the occurrence.

  Thereafter, the special gaming state is entered and the displays shown in FIGS. 11 (n) to 11 (p) are performed. In the case of a big hit generated by the game ball flowing into the specific area, as shown in FIG. 11 (o), a “V” indicating that fact is displayed in the big hit result display 87. Further, since the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted with the end of the special gaming state is forcibly stopped by the result of the disengagement, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 is displayed as shown in FIG. Shows the result of outliers. After the special gaming state ends, the specific gaming state is entered.

  When the special gaming state based on winning a specific area by winning a small game in the specific gaming state or when the special gaming state based on the big jacking generated in the specific gaming state ends, FIG. 12 (q) As shown in FIG. 5, a notification display 88 of “Momo Momo RUSH continued!” Indicating that the specific gaming state is continued is made. In addition, a duration display 89 indicating the duration of the specific gaming state based on the variation time of the newly started special figure 1 variation display game is provided, and a duration display 89 imitating an hourglass as shown in FIG. Indicate that the time measurement is started by inverting. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (s), an effect in the specific gaming state is performed.

  FIGS. 12 (t) to 12 (v) show an example of effects when the specific game state ends without the special game state occurring in the specific game state. As shown in FIGS. 12 (t) and 12 (u), when the remaining time in the specific gaming state is small (for example, 30 seconds remaining), the duration display 89 simulating an hourglass has almost lost the sand and the remaining time is small. It shows that there is. In addition, the facial expression of the character is different from that when the remaining time is sufficient (for example, FIG. 10H), and this also indicates that the remaining time is very small.

  Then, when the specific game state is ended, an effect that the specific game state is ended is made as shown in FIG. In this effect, a notification display 88 of “peach peach RUSH end ...” indicating that the specific gaming state is ended is displayed, and a duration display 89 simulating an hourglass indicates that all the sand has fallen and there is no remaining time. . Since the end of the specific game state is the end of the first special figure 1 variable display game started after the special game state ends, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 displays the special figure 1 variable display game. Result is stopped.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (w), in the peach effect display for showing the normal fluctuation display game being executed in the specific game state, a notice effect that suggests the result of the normal fluctuation display game is indicated by its color. This is done so that the result is more likely to be hit in the order of pink, blue, green, red, and gold. Such a notice effect is performed during a period in which the usual figure change display game is executed as shown in FIGS. 10 (g) and 10 (h), and FIGS.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal variation display game in the specific gaming state can be selected from a plurality of types of variation times. As the fluctuation time, it is assumed that the results of the normal map fluctuation display game are all out of place, the first fluctuation time in which the normal figure fluctuation display game can be executed five times in 30 seconds, and the normal figure fluctuation in 30 seconds. There are three fluctuation times: a second fluctuation time in which the display game can be executed, and a third fluctuation time in which the usual fluctuation display game can be executed 40 times in 30 seconds.

  The above-mentioned variation time is set according to the common pattern shown in FIGS. The normal pattern defines the variation time in four consecutive periods each of 30 seconds, and any one of the five patterns of the normal pattern A to E is selected before the start of the specific gaming state. The As shown in FIG. 14, the normal pattern A is a pattern in which the first variation time is set in any period, and the normal pattern B alternates between the first variation time and the second variation time every period (every 30 seconds). The normal pattern C is a pattern in which the first variation time and the third variation time are alternately set every period (every 30 seconds). Further, the regular pattern D is a pattern for setting the second variation time in any period, and the regular pattern E is a pattern for setting the third variation time in any period. The selection probability of each normal pattern is as shown in FIG. During the specific game state, the set general-purpose pattern is repeatedly performed. Of course, it is also possible to change the normal pattern in the middle.

  If the fluctuation time of the usual figure fluctuation display game is short, the time from the start of the usual figure fluctuation display game until the result becomes a hit and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is released becomes shorter, and further, the normal fluctuation prize is awarded per unit time. Since the rate at which the device 37 is opened increases, it is advantageous for the player. In particular, as in the case of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect is remarkable if it is a setting in which the result is often out of sync even if the probability is usually high. Note that FIG. 14 shows a case in which the normal-variation display game is executed without interruption, and all the results are out of place. However, if the result is a hit, the normal variation winning device 37 is released. The number of times of execution of the usual figure display game is smaller than the case shown here.

  In FIG. 15, the example of the effect display of the common figure change display game in a specific game state was shown. In the case of the first variation time which is the longest variation time, the effects shown in FIGS. And in the case of the 2nd variation time shorter than the 1st variation time, it shifts to the result display of (h) after the production to (a)-(c). Further, in the case of the third variation time shorter than the second variation time, the display shifts to the result display of (h) after the effects up to (a) and (b). In this way, by using only the part corresponding to the fluctuation time from the series of effects, it is possible to cope with multiple fluctuation times by storing one series of effects according to the longest fluctuation time, Data storage capacity can be reduced.

  In the specific gaming state, the set general map pattern was repeated. However, all the periods specified in the general map pattern have passed and the general map pattern has been completed (here, 4 periods total 2 minutes) The normal pattern pattern to be set next may be changed based on the fact that In addition, the fluctuation time of the usual figure pattern and the usual figure fluctuation display game is not limited to the one shown here and can be arbitrarily set.

  Moreover, in each usual pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game can be changed at every passage of the period (every 30 seconds), but the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game is changed depending on other conditions. Also good. For example, winning a separate lottery, derivation of a specific result in a special figure fluctuation display game or a general figure fluctuation display game, execution of a special figure fluctuation display game or a general figure fluctuation display game in a specific gaming state When the number of times reaches a predetermined value, the variation time of the normal variation display game may be changed.

  In addition, in each ordinary figure pattern, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game can be changed every time period (every 30 seconds), but the normal fluctuation prize winning device when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a hit The operation mode (operation pattern) 37 may be changed. For example, the number of opening / closing operations when the result is successful, the time for opening, the timing for converting the open and closed states, and the like are changed. This also makes it possible to change the rate at which the normally variable winning device 37 is released per unit time in each period.

  From the above, it is possible to divide the predetermined period for entering the specific gaming state into a plurality of periods, and to set the high possibility of winning a prize to the normal variation winning device 37 for each period. . In addition, the execution time of the normal fluctuation display game can be individually set for each period. In addition, the time during which the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state per certain unit time can be set individually for each period. In addition, an operation pattern in which the normal variation winning device 37 converts between an open state and a closed state can be individually set for each period.

FIG. 16 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. In other words, the game control device 100 can store and retain information regarding games even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and can resume a game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. And a game information storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated to cancel the error even when the power is not turned on, but in this case, only the error is canceled and processing such as initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed. .

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included. In addition, a variation pattern table for determining the variation time of the normal variation display game is also stored.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111 </ b> A determines whether or not the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the current gaming state (whether or not it is in electric support mode, etc.), the starting memory number, and the like. Any one variation pattern table is selected from the variation pattern tables. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b include a gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a in the general winning port 35, an upper prize port switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, and a second special button. Lower large prize opening switch 39a of the variable prize winning device 39, a specific area switch 38d provided in a specific area in the first special variable prize winning device 38, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning prize opening 36, and an ordinary variable prize winning device 37 A start port 2 switch 37a, a start port 3 switch 48a in the third start winning prize port 48, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e for detecting a game ball discharged from the first special variation winning device 38, and a first special variable winning prize. An illegal ball switch 38g for detecting a game ball staying above a specific area in the device 38 and a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine are connected. That.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and are read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, the lower large winning port switch 39a, the specific area switch 38d, the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the starting port 2 The detection signal of the switch 37 a is input to the second input port 123.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. . Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal from the switch 63, a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, and a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration are also input. Among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the start port 3 switch 48a, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the illegal ball switch 38g are input to the fourth input port 126.

  Among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the outputs of the start port 3 switch 48a and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e among the outputs to the second input port 123 and the fourth input port 126 are: It is also supplied from the main board 100 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 48a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are used for games other than the second input port 123 or the fourth input port 126. It is configured to be input to the microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the upper special prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38, the lower special prize opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39, and the normal fluctuation. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting operation data of a power solenoid 37c for opening the winning device 37 and a lever solenoid 38f for operating a lever member in the first special variable winning device 38. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes an upper large prize opening solenoid 38b, a lower large prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, a general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and a first special variable winning apparatus 38. A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal in response to an operation data signal of a lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member of the inner member, and a current supply of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135 The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal for the segment line on the side, and the third driver for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c, external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is external information The fourth driver 138d is provided for outputting to the terminal board 71.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

  Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning prize port 36, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 1 in the third start winning prize port 48. The switch 48a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning prize opening switch 38a, the lower winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 38d in the first special variable winning winning apparatus 38, and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 38e include a coil for magnetic detection. There is used a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And process such as solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the effect button 25, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

  In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36 and the start port 3 switch 48a provided in the third start winning port 48, The random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted and the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Also, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted and stored in the RAM 111C for the second start. Memorize the memory. The random number value for determining the big hit in the second start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the starting winning area (first starting winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, third starting winning port 48) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

  In addition, the game control device 100 sets various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls to the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 48) to a predetermined number as the upper limit. A first start storage means that can be stored as a first start storage that has a right to execute the variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is provided. Further, the game control device 100 uses the second variation display game (see Fig. 2 variation) with various random numbers extracted based on establishment of a predetermined start condition (winning to the normal variation winning device 37) up to a predetermined number. A second start storage means that can be stored as a second start storage that has the right to execute the display game. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game executing means for executing the first variation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the second variation display game based on the second start memory. A two-variable display game execution means is provided.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit. To perform the process. Further, even when a game ball flows into a specific area of the first special variation winning device 38, a process for generating a special game state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the lower big prize opening solenoid 39b, and allows the game ball to flow into the lower big prize winning opening. Control. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved, Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game that the game control device 100 has won in the first special variable winning device 38 when the result of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game) is a special result. Based on the inflow of the ball into the specific area, special game state generating means for controlling the second special variable winning device 39 to generate a special game state for converting to the open state is provided.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a small hit result mode on the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a small hit gaming state. Do. In the process of generating a small hit gaming state, the upper special prize opening solenoid 38b opens the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 for a predetermined time, thereby allowing the game ball to flow into the upper special prize opening. Control. That is, the game control device 100 can convert the first special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (when the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit). Special variable winning device control means. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for determining the hit of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. Then, the determination value stored in the ROM 111B is compared with the determination value to determine whether or not the normal variation display game is missed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display 74, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. Control.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as third variation display game execution means for executing a third variation display game (ordinary variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (passing through the ordinary diagram start gate 34). In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a normal variation winning device control means for controlling the normal variation winning device 37 to be converted to an open state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a normal variation display game is won). If the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, the general map display 74 is controlled to display the result form of the shift.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a normal power support state (a specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends. In the ordinary power support state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in a specific operation state, and the normal variation per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of the winning device 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased. In other words, after the special control state is finished, the game control device 100 is designated as the first variation display game (see Fig. 1 variation display game or special diagram) in which the normal variation prize-winning device 37 can be opened. A specific gaming state control means that can be controlled so as to be set over a predetermined period in which a two-variable display game) is executed a predetermined number of times (may be one or more times).

  For example, in the ordinary power support state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described ordinary map variation display game (ordinary diagram variation time) to be a second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 ms is 500 ms). Further, in the ordinary power support state, it is possible to control so that the ordinary map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Further, in the normal power support state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal-game variable display game, the open time (the normal power open time) is the first open time (for example, the normal power open time) (for example, It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 200 ms) longer than 72 ms. Also, in the ordinary power support state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of ordinary power) is set to be greater than the first number of times of opening (for example, once) with respect to the result of one hit of the universal map display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening many times (for example, 5 times). Further, in the ordinary power support state, the probability (the ordinary figure probability) that is the hit result of the ordinary map variable display game is higher than the low probability (for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state (for example) 17. / 251.

  In the specific gaming state, the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Extend the time to change state more than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of specific game states that are different. In the present embodiment, it is set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 18, after first performing a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step X1), a stack pointer which is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs A stack pointer setting process (step X2) is set. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step X12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 19 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step X21 of FIG. 19, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted (step X22). As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. . When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, a special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, and this flag is stored and held even while the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Yes. When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, a special figure 2 game interruption flag is set during the interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped for this flag. Make sure that you can keep it in between.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step X22; N), the process proceeds to step X24. When the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (step X22; Y), a suspended command corresponding to the suspended special figure is set (step X23).

  After that, a command at the time of power failure restoration corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). Proceed to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and an interrupted command are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, if both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor being in a special game state, the customer is waiting. Send a waiting demo screen command, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X25), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step X27). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demonstration screen and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). And a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step X30, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) An initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) or ordinary symbol random number) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X32), and interruption is permitted (step X33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the normal hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operation clock. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the normal hit number are program processing units. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt process. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the common symbol hit random number, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. In other words, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the normal hit random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X35). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X34) (step X33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step X34 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X38), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step X41). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X42) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X43), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off.

  As described above, the information stored in the RAM 111C can be stored even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area. At the same time, by calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power is shut off when the power is turned on again. That is, the game control device 100 backs up information related to the game when a power failure occurs, and also serves as a backup means for restarting the game after recovery from the power failure based on the backed up information.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 20 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X42) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 21 shows the initial value random number update process (step X34) in the main process described above. In the initial value random number update process, first, the normal hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61). Next, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X62), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X63), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the result in the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is the jackpot stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation display game. The random number that is the initial value of the random number to be determined, “small hit symbol initial value random number”, is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol in the special figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 22 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At Step X102, the same processing as Step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port.

  Then, based on output data set in various processes, output for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large prize opening solenoid 38b, lower large prize opening solenoid 39b, general electric solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f), etc. Processing (step X104) is performed. It should be noted that after outputting a firing stop signal in step X5 in the main process, this output process is performed, whereby a firing permission signal is output, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 48a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a. A winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step X108) for monitoring and error monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether an error or fraud has occurred (step X109). Here, the waiting state for release based on vibration fraud due to vibration applied to the gaming machine, the waiting state for release based on magnet fraud due to detection of abnormal magnetism, radio wave fraud due to detection of abnormal radio waves, first special When any one of the waiting states for release based on an abnormality relating to the number of game balls remaining in the variable winning device 38 is applicable, it is determined that an error / injustice is occurring. If an error / illegal occurrence is occurring, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set.

  If an error or fraud has occurred (step X109; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing. If no error or fraud is occurring (step X109; N), a start port switch monitoring process (step X110) for monitoring the detection of winning at the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 48a. )I do.

  In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted based on the winning of game balls to the first start winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the third starting winning port 48. Then, a special figure 1 game process (step X111) for performing a process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 game process (step X112) for performing a process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a process relating to the general figure variable display game. The usual game process to be performed (step X113) is performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step X114) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. Then, a solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed (step X115), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked to determine whether there is any abnormality. In addition, a fraud monitoring process (step X116) is performed in which a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality. Further, external information editing processing (step X117) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

  Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125). Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and a switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

  Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130). Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), and a switch reading process (step X133) is performed.

  Then, the address of the input port 4, that is, the fourth input port 126 is prepared (step X134), and the address of the switch control area 4 in the RWM is prepared (step X135). Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X136), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X137), switch reading processing (step X138) is performed, and input processing is terminated.

  In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory. In addition, as information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared for each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128, X133, XX138) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state of the target switch control area is set. Save (store) (step X144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state ( The first data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step X151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second reads is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step X152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 16) for outputting the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, it is determined whether an error or fraud has occurred (step X162). This determination is the same as the determination in step X109 of the timer interrupt process. If no error or fraud has occurred (step X162; N), the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper prize winning solenoid 38b, the lower prize winning solenoid 39b, the power solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f. Are synthesized and output (step X163), and the process proceeds to step X165. If an error or fraud has occurred (step X162; Y), off data is output to the solenoid output port (step X164), and the process proceeds to step X165. That is, in this case, in order to stop the game, the solenoid is set to a state when no game is being performed.

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X165), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S165). X166), and outputs the acquired data to the digit output port 136 (step X167). As a result, each display unit of the collective display device 50 (the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the universal figure display 74, the storage display part 54, the universal figure storage display part 75, the round display part 60, the first The gaming state display unit 76 and the second gaming state display unit 77) are controlled by dynamic control.

  Next, it is determined whether an error or fraud has occurred (step X168). This determination is the same as the determination in step X109 of the timer interrupt process. If no error or fraud has occurred (step X168; N), the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step X169), and the loaded data is a port for segment output. It outputs to 135 (step X170). Then, output data for permission to fire is set as a fire permission signal (step X171), and the process proceeds to step X174. If an error or fraud has occurred (step X168; Y), the off data is output to the segment output port (step X172), and the output data for stopping the firing is set as the firing permission signal (step X173). The process proceeds to step X174. That is, in this case, in order to stop the game, the display of the collective display device 50 is stopped. In addition, it is assumed that the game ball has also been stopped. Note that the output data of the firing permission signal is generated only in step X171 or step X173, and is not generated in other processes.

  Then, the various output data of the external information output to the external information terminal board 71 and the output data of the launch are combined (step X174), and the combined data is output to the port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step X175). ). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X176). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X177).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X178). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X179). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X180) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X191). Return to Step X188.

  As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that the busy state is also in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the count number has been checked (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and a prize area (first start prize port 36, normal variation prize winning device 37, third start prize port 48, general prize slot 35, first prize hole 35, which is provided in the game area 32 is controlled. A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on a winning of a game ball to the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a prize ball sent from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the command, and the game control means can start the payout control by the payout control means output from the payout control means. Based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control means can start payout control. Show that there is Even if the status signal is output, the award ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output over a predetermined period. In response to this, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 includes different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, third starting winning opening 48, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special winning prize apparatus 38, and second special winning prize apparatus 38). A plurality of variable prize-winning devices 39) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) is capable of specifying for each prize ball number whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. (Game control device 100), the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, a prize ball command is issued to the payout control means ( Whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter is used to determine whether or not the status signal can start the payout control. To be done before the identification of .

  In addition to performing overall game control, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, third starting winning port 48, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, first (2) a game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and a game ball of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control device 200) that performs payout control, and the game control means is a payout controller that outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. When it is indicated that the control can be started, a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and a payout is made in accordance with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined prize area. Number of award balls determined External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information related to the game machine to the outside, and the external information output means is output from the payout control means The signal indicates that a prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start payout control.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37, third start winning port). 48, a general winning slot 35, a first special variable winning device 38, and a second special variable winning device 39) are used to generate a prize ball command, and the status signal can start payout control. In the case shown, it is configured to transmit one prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) receives one prize in a predetermined winning area. The winning as a unit Information balls can be stored and updated at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined winning area, and updated in response to transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means, so that a prize ball not transmitted The number of instructions can be stored, and the external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls in a predetermined winning area, and each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, a winning ball signal Is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize to the predetermined prize area, and the game ball to the predetermined prize area is stored. By updating at the time of winning a prize and updating in correspondence with the process of accumulating the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 27 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the normal hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number that are targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). In addition, when the normal random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the normal initial random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the loaded normal random number The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X227). If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step X224; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. Is set in a register (start value setting register) holding a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X226). Then, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X227).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X227; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X227; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X228), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 28 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variation pattern random number 2) and a 2-byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 1 and 3) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the R register provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired and the value of the R register is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and proceeds to step X239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step X244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111 </ b> A has a special figure variation display game out of various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting areas of the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and the third starting winning opening 48. Random number updating means for updating a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation mode (fluctuation pattern) is provided.

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
FIG. 29 shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). In the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a remaining ball error monitoring process for monitoring the discharge of game balls won in the first special variable winning device 38 is performed (step X301). Then, an illegal prize monitoring table corresponding to the lower big prize opening switch 39a in the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is prepared (step X302). An illegal & winning monitoring process (step X303) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  In the unauthorized winning monitoring table (illegal monitoring table), the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the unauthorized monitoring information, the lower address of the unauthorized winning number area, the unauthorized winning error Information of a notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination number), and an address of the winning mouth switch table is defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening switch tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, an unauthorized prize monitoring table corresponding to the upper prize winning switch 38a in the upper prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step X304), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is achieved. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step X305) is detected. Next, an illegal prize monitoring table corresponding to the prize opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) is prepared (step X306), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal prize and a normal prize is awarded. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step X307) is detected.

  Next, a prize monitoring table is prepared for a prize opening switch (here, the opening 1 switch 36a, the starting 3 switch 48a, and the award opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always be awarded and does not require fraud monitoring (step X308), a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (step X309) is performed. Then, an illegal ball monitoring process is performed to detect an illegal act of illegally staying the game ball above the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 (step X310).

  Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X311). This error scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the error scan counter (step X312). Then, an error check process (step X313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the error scan counter value in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1, when the error scan counter value is 0, monitoring of the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. If the error scan counter value is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the error scan counter value is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the error scan counter value is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the error scan counter (step X314). Then, an error check process (step X315) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the error scan counter value in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2, if the error scan counter value is 0, the status monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and the error scan is set. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the error scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the error scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X316). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X316; N), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine error monitoring table 3 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X316; Y), the gaming machine error monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X317) and an error check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred (step X317). Step X318) is performed.

  By referring to the error scan counter value in the gaming machine error monitoring table 3, when the error scan counter value is 0, the state can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. Is set. The gaming machine error monitoring table 3 is not defined when the error scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X319) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / error monitoring process ends. To do. Note that the processing from step X317 to X319 is executed only when the value of the error scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step X317 to X319 is performed every 16 ms.

[Remaining sphere error monitoring process]
FIG. 30 shows the remaining ball error monitoring process (step X301) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. This remaining ball error monitoring process is a process for monitoring the discharge of the game ball that has flowed into the first special variation winning device 38. In this residual sphere error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 38d (step X381). If there is no input to the specific area switch 38d (step X381; N), the process proceeds to step X388. If there is an input to the specific area switch 38d (step X381; Y), it is determined whether the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step X382).

  The remaining ball counter is a counter for managing the remaining balls that are game balls remaining in the first special variable winning device 38. All the game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 are detected by the upper prize winning port switch 38a. Further, the game ball discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 is discharged through the specific area or the remaining ball discharge port, and is thus detected by the specific area switch 38d or the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. Therefore, as described later, the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1 when a game ball is detected by the top prize winning switch 38a, and the remaining ball is detected when the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d or the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By decrementing the counter by 1, the value of the remaining ball counter indicates the number of game balls remaining in the first special variation winning device 38.

  If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step X382; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the first special variable winning device 38, the remaining ball counter is updated by -1 (step X387), and the process proceeds to step X388. To do. In this case, the game ball that was in the first special variable winning device 38 is discharged through the specific area.

  On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X382; Y), that is, when a game ball is detected in a specific area even though there is no game ball in the first special variable winning device 38, Then, it is determined whether an error or fraud is occurring (step X383). This determination is the same as the determination in step X109 of the timer interrupt process. If an error or fraud has occurred (step X383; Y), the process proceeds to step X388. In this case, since processing relating to errors and fraud has already been performed, processing relating to errors and fraud is not performed here.

  If no error or fraud has occurred (step X383; N), an abnormal payout error occurrence command is prepared (step X384), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X385). As a result, an abnormal payout error occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as notification of an abnormality based on this command. Thereafter, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set (step X386), and the process proceeds to step X388. As a result, errors and fraud are occurring.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (step X388). If there is no input to the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (step X388; N), the process proceeds to step X395. If there is an input to the remaining sphere outlet switch 38e (step X388; Y), it is determined whether the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step X389).

  If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step X389; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the first special variable winning device 38, the remaining ball counter is updated by -1 (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X395. . In this case, the game ball in the first special variable winning device 38 is discharged through the remaining ball discharge port.

  On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X389; Y), that is, the game ball is detected at the remaining ball discharge port even though there is no game ball in the first special variable winning device 38. In the case, it is determined whether an error or fraud has occurred (step X390). This determination is the same as the determination in step X109 of the timer interrupt process. If an error or fraud has occurred (step X390; Y), the process proceeds to step X395. In this case, since processing relating to errors and fraud has already been performed, processing relating to errors and fraud is not performed here.

  If no error or fraud has occurred (step X390; N), an abnormal payout error occurrence command is prepared (step X391), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X392). Thereafter, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set (step X393), and the process proceeds to step X395. As a result, errors and fraud are occurring.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning port switch 38a (step X395). If there is no input to the top prize winning port switch 38a (step X395; N), the process proceeds to step X398 in FIG. When there is an input to the top prize winning port switch 38a (step X395; Y), the remaining ball counter is updated by +1 (step X396). When the remaining ball counter reaches the upper limit, the upper limit value is maintained without returning to 0. Then, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the remaining sphere error monitoring timer (step X397), and the process proceeds to step X398 in FIG. The remaining ball error monitoring timer is a timer for determining an abnormality when the game ball stays in the first special variation winning device 38 for a long time, and the first special variation winning device has no abnormality as an initial value. A time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into and after the gas flows into 38 is set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a residual sphere error is occurring (step X398). The remaining ball error is a state in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the game ball finally flowed into the first special fluctuation winning device 38. If the remaining sphere error is not in progress (step X398; N), it is determined whether the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step X399).

  If the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step X399; Y), the remaining sphere error monitoring process is terminated. If the remaining sphere counter is not 0 (step X399; N), the remaining sphere error monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step X400), and it is determined whether the remaining sphere error monitoring timer has become 0 (step X401). If the remaining sphere error monitoring timer is not 0 (step X401; N), the remaining sphere error monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when the remaining ball error monitoring timer is 0 (step X401; Y), that is, the game ball is discharged even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more has passed since the game ball finally flowed into the first special winning device 38. Is not confirmed, a residual sphere error occurrence flag is set as a residual sphere error (step X402). This causes a residual sphere error. Further, a remaining sphere error occurrence command is prepared (step X403), an effect command setting process is performed (step X404), and the remaining sphere error monitoring process is terminated. As a result, a residual sphere error occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as notification of an abnormality based on this command.

  On the other hand, when the remaining sphere error is in progress (step X398; Y), it is determined whether the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step X405). If the remaining sphere counter is not 0 (step X405; N), the remaining sphere error monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the residual sphere error is not solved. If the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step X405; Y), that is, if the remaining sphere error is eliminated, the remaining sphere error occurrence flag is cleared (step X406). As a result, there is no remaining sphere error. Further, a remaining sphere error cancel command is prepared (step X407), an effect command setting process is performed (step X408), and the remaining sphere error monitoring process is terminated. As a result, a remaining ball error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs a process of terminating an abnormality notification or the like based on this command.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 32 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps X303, X305, and X307) in the above-described prize opening switch / error monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on the upper special prize opening switch 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the lower big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the start opening two switch 37a of the normal variable prize winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37, it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening a door and inserting a game ball and paying out a winning ball. Monitor fraud in addition to detection.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned remaining ball error is occurring (step X321), and if it is a remaining ball error (step X321; Y), the process proceeds to step X323. That is, when the remaining ball error is in progress, winning in the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37 is treated as an illegal winning.

  If the remaining ball error is not in progress (step X321; N), it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is in the fraud monitoring period (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than a state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (in this embodiment, the small hit gaming state) when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper large winning port switch 38a. When the prize port to be monitored is the lower large prize port switch 39a, it is a period other than the state in which the second special variable prize device 39 is opened (in this embodiment, the special game state). Further, when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (in the present embodiment, the normal hit state).

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the process proceeds to step X334. If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, 2) is determined (step X325).

  For example, when the number of determinations is two, the game ball is caught in the door member of the winning port when the winning port in the open state is converted to the closed state, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the winning port switch. This is because when a prize is won or when noise is added to a signal, it is not determined to be illegal, and it is not illegal but is not easily determined as an error.

  If the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step X325; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step X326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 6326). X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting a winning ball is performed. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step X336), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step X339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step X340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step X341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 33 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X309 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, it is determined whether an error or fraud has occurred (step X351). This determination is the same as the determination in step X109 of the timer interrupt process. If an error or fraud has occurred (step X351; Y), the winning counter update process is terminated. If no error or fraud is occurring (step X351; N), the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning monitoring table (step X352) and input to the target winning port switch (exactly) It is determined whether there is a change in input (step X353).

  If there is no input (step X353: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X362), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X363). If there is an input (step X353; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X354), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X355), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X355). Step X356). If no overflow has occurred (step X356; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X357), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X358). ). When an overflow occurs (step X356; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X358).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X358), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X359), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X360). If no overflow has occurred (step X360; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X361), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X362). ), It is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X363). If an overflow has occurred (step X360; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X362), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X363).

  If all the switches have not been monitored (step X363; N), the process returns to the process (step X353) for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. If all the switches have been monitored (step X363; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 35 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). Then, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Illegal sphere monitoring process]
FIG. 34 shows the illegal ball monitoring process (step X310) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. The first special variation winning device 38 is provided with an illegal ball switch 38g for detecting a game ball present at a position above the specific area. The area monitored by the illegal ball switch 38g usually flows down without the game ball stopping, so that the detection time of the game ball by the illegal ball switch 38g is very short. However, for example, when illegally aiming to flow into a specific area by means of a thread fishing ball, the line fishing ball will be kept waiting above this specific area. The game ball at the illegal ball switch 38g is detected for a long time. In the illegal ball monitoring process, the illegal act is monitored based on the detection time of the game ball by the illegal ball switch 38g.

  In this illegal sphere monitoring process, it is first determined from the input state to the fourth input port 126 whether the illegal sphere switch 38g is on (step X411). If the illegal ball switch is not on (step X411; N), that is, if a game ball staying above a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 is not detected, the on-monitoring timer area of the illegal ball switch is set. 0 is cleared (step X420), and the process proceeds to step X421.

  Further, when the illegal ball switch is on (step X411; Y), that is, when the presence of a game ball in the first special variation winning device 38 is detected, the on-monitoring timer of the illegal ball switch is updated by +1. (Step X412), it is determined whether the on-monitoring timer is less than a specified time (300 ms in this case) (Step X413). If the on-monitoring timer is less than the specified time (step X413; Y), the process proceeds to step X421.

  If the on-monitoring timer is not less than the specified time (step X413; N), that is, if it is determined that the illegal ball error, the specified time value is saved in the on-monitoring timer area of the illegal ball switch (step X414). The initial value (here, 6000 ms) is saved in the ball error notification timer area (step X415).

  Further, an illegal sphere error occurrence command is prepared (step X416), and it is determined whether an illegal sphere error has already occurred (step X417). If an illegal sphere error has already occurred (step X417; Y), the process proceeds to step X421. If no illegal sphere error has already occurred (step X417; N), the abnormal flag is saved in the illegal sphere error flag area (step X418), and a production command setting process is performed to set an illegal sphere error occurrence command. (Step X419), the process proceeds to Step X421.

  If the illegal ball error notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X421), and it is determined whether the illegal ball error notification timer is 0 (step X422). If the illegal ball error notification timer is not 0 (step X422; N), the illegal ball monitoring process is terminated. If the illegal ball error notification timer is 0 (step X422; Y), it is determined whether an illegal ball error is occurring (step X423).

  If no illegal sphere error is occurring (step X423; N), the illegal sphere monitoring process is terminated. If an illegal sphere error is occurring (step X423; Y), the normal flag is saved in the illegal sphere error flag area (step X424), and an effect command setting process is performed to execute an illegal sphere error non-occurrence command. The setting is made (step X425), and the illegal sphere monitoring process is terminated.

  It should be noted that when the illegal ball switch 38g continuously detects the presence of a game ball above a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 for a specified time (300 ms in this case) or more, an illegal ball error is detected. When the switch 38g continuously detects the presence of the game ball above the specific area in the first special variable prize winning device 38 for a predetermined time (300 ms in this case) or more, the illegal ball is generated a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). An error may be set. By doing in this way, when the ball clogging in the 1st special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 38 generate | occur | produces, it can prevent treating illegally immediately.

[Error check processing]
FIG. 36 shows the error check process (steps X313, X315, and X318) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. In this error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether a switch (signal) to be monitored is on (step X452).

  In the error monitoring table, information corresponding to the error scan counter is defined. This information includes, for example, an error notification end command, a lower address of the port input state area 2 of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, a lower address of the input information of the error monitoring area, and only the bit of the target signal. Mask data to be extracted, signal ON determination data, error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value, and error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value.

  If the target switch is not on (step X452: N), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step X453), and a target error notification end command is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target switch state area is compared with the current switch state (step X459). The case where the target switch is not on (step X452: N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, if the target switch is on (step X452: Y), an error occurrence flag is prepared as an error flag (step X456), and a target error notification command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target switch state area is compared with the current switch state (step X459). When the target switch is on (step X452: Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target switch status area matches the current switch status (step X459; Y), that is, if the switch status has not changed, the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step X462). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target error monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target switch state area does not match the current switch state (step X459; N), that is, if the switch state changes, the current switch state is saved in the target switch state area ( Step X460). Then, the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target error monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the error check process is terminated. When the value of the target error monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1 (step X464). The error flag is compared with the value in the target error flag area (step X465).

  If the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step X465; Y), the error check process is terminated. If the prepared error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (step X465; N), the prepared error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), and the error check process is terminated. As a result, the error notification end command prepared in step X454 or the error notification command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 37 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X319) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), a normal flag is prepared as a status flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is ON (step X471; Y), a busy flag is prepared as a status flag (step X474), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of on and off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step X479).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step) X480). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is −1. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

  When the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the electric support mode (specific game state) is being performed (step X494). . And when it is not in electric support mode (Step X494; N), it shifts to Step X497. Further, when the electric support mode is in effect (step X494; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). Thereafter, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and special figure 1 start port switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed strike is performed by display, voice, or the like. Right hitting is more advantageous for the player when in the electric support mode, and if a winning is detected during the electric support mode at the first start winning port 36, which is such that no winning is possible unless left-handed. Instruction notification is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the start port 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37) (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and a big hit random number is obtained based on winning in the ordinary variation winning device 37 In step X501, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set.

  When the start opening prize presence information is not set based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X506. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the start opening prize presence information is set based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal power operation is in operation (step X502).

  During normal power operation is a state in which there is a possibility that the normal variation winning device 37 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting a winning is that the movable member 37b is activated and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won, and also during a predetermined period after being converted from an open state to a closed state. Including. When the normal electric operation is being performed (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Further, when the normal power operation is not being performed (step X502; N), it is determined whether the normal power fraud is occurring (step X503).

  In the case of the occurrence of fraudulent power transmission, the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (for example, two), and the fraudulent winning occurrence flag corresponding to the normal variation winning device 37 is set. Is the case. When the power transmission fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X506. In addition, when the power transmission fraud is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and special figure 2 start port switch processing is performed (step X505). , The process proceeds to step X506.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 3 (third starting winning port 48) (step X506), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X507), and the big hit random number is calculated based on the winning at the third starting winning port 48. It is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when it is acquired (step X508).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening prize is set based on the winning at the third start winning opening 48 (step X508; Y), a table for setting information on hold by the start opening 3 is prepared (step X509). FIG. 1 Start-up switch processing is performed (step X510). Then, an initial value (for example, 10 seconds) is saved in the start port 3 winning monitoring timer area (step X511), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

  If the game ball is won in the third start winning port 48 in the normal game state (electric support mode (specific game state), special game state, or neither state of small hit game state), it is left-handed. The instruction notification command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, in the production control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to left-hand is displayed by display or voice.

  On the other hand, when the information on the start opening winning a prize is not set based on the winning at the third starting winning opening 48 (step X508; N), that is, when the information on no start opening winning is set, the electric support mode (specific game) It is determined whether it is in a state) (step X512). If it is not in the electric support mode (step X512; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the power support mode is in effect (step X512; Y), it is determined whether or not the firing touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 and detecting the presence or absence of contact with the operation unit 24 is on (step X513).

  If the firing touch switch is not on (step X513; N), that is, if the player is not touching the operation unit 24 (no firing operation is performed), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the firing touch switch is on (step X513; Y), that is, when the player is touching the operation unit 24 (the firing operation is performed), the start port 3 winning monitoring timer is updated by -1. (Step X514), it is determined whether the start port 3 winning monitoring timer is 0 (Step X515).

  When the start port 3 winning monitoring timer is not 0 (step X515; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the starting port 3 winning monitoring timer is 0 (step X515; Y), an initial value (for example, 10 seconds) is saved in the starting port 3 winning monitoring timer area (step X516). Then, a start opening 3 no-notification notification command is prepared (step X517), an effect command setting process is performed (step X518), and the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the start opening 3 no-notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as notification of an abnormality based on this command. In addition, about the completion | finish of alerting | reporting, the effect control apparatus 300 is made to complete alerting | reporting when predetermined time passes from the start of alerting | reporting.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second sorting device 92 is provided in the game area 32 where the game ball flows down when the player hits the right side so that the game ball always wins at the third start winning port 48, and the right strike is made. Thus, the first start memory is generated even in the specific game state in which the game proceeds. If the game is in a specific game state in which the game proceeds with a right-hand hit, an error will occur if the game ball has not been won in the third start winning port 48 for a predetermined time despite the game ball being fired. And so on. Note that this predetermined time is a time sufficiently longer than the interval at which the game ball wins the third start winning opening 48 when the game is progressing by right-handed when no abnormality or the like has occurred.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the specific gaming state is a period until one special figure 1 variable display game is executed. Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game big hit, 80% is a big hit that does not become the specific gaming state, whereas all big hits of the special figure 2 variable display game are the big hits that become the specific gaming state. Therefore, if the specific game state is started without the first start memory and the first start memory is not generated even during the specific game state, the specific game state will not end except for the occurrence of the big hit. State and jackpot will be continuous. Therefore, the second distribution device 92 is provided so that the game ball always wins at the third start winning port 48 so that the first start memory is generated even in a specific game state in which the game progresses with a right-handed hit. There is a possibility that the specific gaming state is terminated except for the occurrence of.

  However, if the game ball does not win the third start winning port 48 due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball or an illegal act, the specific game state and the big hit will be continued as described above, so that it is the specific game state. If a game ball has not been won at the third start winning port 48 for a predetermined time even though the game ball is being fired, an error is notified to prevent the game store from being damaged. doing.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 39 shows the hard random number acquisition processing (steps X492, X500, and X507) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start opening no winning information is set (step X581), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X582).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X582; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is an input to the target switch (step X582; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X583), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X584).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X584; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X584; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X585). Then, the start opening winning presence information is set (step X586), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Start Switch Processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 1 start port switch process (steps X498 and X510) in the start port switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure 1 start opening switch process, first, the start is the number of times information relating to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 48 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The mouth signal 1 output count is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, looping by +1 update results in 0, so the updated value is not saved.

  If the special figure 1 hold count is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 hold count is updated by one (step X526). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step X527), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is used as the RWM big hit random number. Save in the storage area (step X528).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X529), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X530). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X531). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step X532), which is a prefetching process, is performed to prepare a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step X533), and an effect command setting process is performed ( Step X534), and the special figure 1 start port switch processing is terminated. That is, the first start memory in which the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) can store the first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the third start winning opening 48. Make a means.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X532) in the special figure 1 start port switch process described above. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the first start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory. In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric support mode (specific gaming state) is in effect (step X541), and if in the electric support mode (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is determined. Exit. If it is not in the electric support mode (step X541; N), it is determined whether a big hit, that is, a special gaming state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If it is a big hit (step X542; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not being hit (step X542; N), a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not (step X543). If the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X548).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), outlier stop symbol information is set (step X547), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X548).

  After preparing a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X548), an effect command setting process is performed (step X549). Next, a special figure information setting process (step X550) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed ( Step X551).

  Then, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern and the second-half variation number indicating the second-half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game are prepared (step X552), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X553), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step X550 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step X551 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal process. .

  With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory and the prefetch variation including information on the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory. A pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Accordingly, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the first start memory is used as the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the corresponding first start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified earlier, in particular by changing the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Result related information can be notified.

  That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. A possible first determination means. In addition, the game control device 100 uses the start memory (one or a plurality of random numbers stored as the start memory) stored in the start winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory. (E.g., whether or not a special result is obtained) is determined beforehand. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  This special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, the prefetch process is not performed in the electric support mode or in the special game state, but the prefetch process may be performed even in such a case.

[Special Figure 2 Start Switch Processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 start port switch process (step X505) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure 2 start port switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times the information related to the number of wins to the normal variation winning device 37, is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step X564), and the start port 2 (normally variable winning device 37) is invalid. Determine if it is inside.

  The start opening 2 winning is invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game with special results (big hit) is stopped (during special figure display processing described later), special gaming state, small hit gaming state and special figure A two-variable display game is being executed. When the start port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure 2 start port switch process is terminated. If the start port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 holding number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (step X569). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM small symbol random number storage area (step X570), and the special symbol 2 start port switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37. Note that the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is extracted at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Of course, it may be extracted and stored here.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 suspension flag that is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended is set (step Y100). When the special figure 1 suspension flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the following special figure 1 is executed. Processing related to the variable display game is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 suspension flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y114. Without proceeding to step Y115. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In step Y101, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is being hit, that is, whether or not the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit (step Y101). If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y101; Y), the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103). On the other hand, when the big hit shown in FIG. 1 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower major prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 is performed. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit. As for the special game state executed based on the big hit or the small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game process timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y115 and the subsequent processes are performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 1 Special processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y108). When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, A special figure 1 in-display process (step Y110) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A lower large winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening or the special figure 1 Lower big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y115), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y116) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 ends the game process. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 suspension flag that is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is set (step Y130). When the special figure 2 suspension flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended, the process proceeds to step Y131, and the following special figure 2 is performed. Processing related to the variable display game is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 suspension flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in steps Y131 to Y149. Without moving to step Y150. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues. Note that in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted, so the process of step Y130 may be omitted.

  At step Y131, whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit or if the game ball flows into a specific area of the first special fluctuation winning device 38, It is determined whether or not the special game state to be executed is based on (step Y131). And when it is not in the big hit of special figure 2 (step Y131; N), it moves to step Y133. When the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y131; Y), the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the detection of the game ball in the specific area is performed (step Y132). Step Y133).

  In the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower major prize opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, a special figure is executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or that a big hit is caused by a game ball flowing into a specific area of the first special variable winning device 38. The lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is performed for the gaming state, and the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit in the special figure 1 game process described above. Performs winning mouth switch monitoring processing.

  Next, after performing a specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) for monitoring the detection of the game ball in the specific area, the upper prize port switch monitoring for monitoring the detection of the game ball in the first special variable winning device 38. Processing is performed (step Y134). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y135).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136). If the value of the special figure 2 game process timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y150 to perform the subsequent processes. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y137). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y138), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y139).

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” in step Y139, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, FIG. 2 A special process 2 (step Y140) for setting information necessary for performing the changing process is performed. In step Y139, if the special figure 2 game process number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y141) is performed.

  In step Y139, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, Set the fanfare time according to the big prize opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform processing during the fanfare / interval, etc. A special chart 2 display process (step Y142) is performed to set a fanfare command according to the setting, information necessary to perform the small hit pre-release process, and the like.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y139, the information necessary for setting the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38 in the small hit gaming state and performing the small hit releasing process. The small hit release pre-processing (step Y143) is performed for setting and the like. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y139, a small hit releasing process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. In step Y139, when the special figure 2 game process number is “5”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 or an inflow to the specific area is performed. If there is, a small hit remaining ball process (step Y145) for performing a process related to the occurrence of the special game state is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “6” in step Y139, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the big prize opening opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y146) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “7” in step Y139, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, A lower large winning opening opening process (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y139, if the special figure 2 game process number is “8”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, Lower big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y139, if the special figure 2 game process number is "9", a big hit end process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 routine process (step Y140) is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y150), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y151) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game process. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Shimodai prize exit switch monitoring process]
FIG. 45 shows the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the lower major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (step Y161). If the lower prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y163. If the lower major winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball processing of the lower major winning opening is being performed (step Y162).

  If the remaining ball process of the lower prize winning port is not being processed (step Y162; N), the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining ball processing of the lower prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y163). In the determination of steps Y161 and Y162, the determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set. You may make it determine based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch (step Y163; N), the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step Y163; Y), the lower major prize opening for counting the number of winnings to the lower major prize opening added in the current lower major prize opening switch monitoring process. The number of counts is updated by +1 (step Y164), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y165), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y166). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect in response to winning in the second special variable winning device 39. Then, it is determined whether or not the lower large winning mouth count number has reached an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) or more (step Y167).

  If the lower major prize opening count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y167; N), the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process ends. Also, when the lower major winning mouth count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y167; Y), the lower major winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step Y168), and the target special figure game processing timer area is set to 0. Clear (step Y169) and finish the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process. As a result, the lower grand prize opening is closed and one round is completed.

[Specific area port switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 46 shows the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether a small hit is being made (step Y171). Here, during the small hit, it is a period during which the small hit open processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If the small hit is not being made (step Y171; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the specific area switch 38d is enabled only during the period in which the small hit opening process and the small hit remaining ball process are being performed. If the small hit is being made (step Y171; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step Y172).

  If the condition device is in operation (step Y172; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If the condition device is not in operation (step Y172; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step Y173). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step Y173; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step Y173; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step Y174), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. Later, based on the presence of the specific area passing flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

[Monitoring process for the upper prize winning switch]
FIG. 47 shows the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process (step Y134) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In this upper prize winning port switch monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning port switch (step Y181). If there is no input (step Y181; N), the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process is performed. finish. If there is an input (step Y181; Y), it is determined whether or not the upper prize winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y182).

  If the upper prize winning opening is not being opened (step Y182; N), the upper prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. The upper large winning opening switch 38a is directly below the opening / closing door 38c and detects a game ball flowing into the first special variable winning device 38, so that the remaining balls are not monitored. Whether the top prize winning opening is open may be determined by referring to the special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether it is open or not may be set. The determination may be made based on the flag.

  If the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y182; Y), the upper prize winning opening for counting the number of winning prizes to the upper prize winning opening added in the current upper prize winning switch monitoring process is counted. The count number is updated by +1 (step Y183), and it is determined whether or not the number of top winning prize counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y184).

  If the upper prize winning port count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (here, 10) (step Y184; N), the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the upper prize winning count number exceeds the upper limit (step Y184; Y), the upper prize winning count number is kept at the upper limit (step Y185), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y186), the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the top prize winning opening.

  In addition, when the number of upper prize winning unit counts is updated by +1, an effect is executed in response to the winning of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by transmitting the upper university winning mouth count command to the effect control device 300. It may be possible.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 process number “0” is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y214), and the special figure 1 game process number is set. The process number of the special figure 1 ordinary process set in the area is saved (step Y215), and the special figure 1 ordinary process is terminated.

  Further, when the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). When the left hand instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, that is, when the first special figure 1 variable display game after the special game state ends. A left-handed instruction notification is performed when the state is shifted.

  If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y214. If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (whether or not it is a specific gaming state) is prepared (step Y207). Command setting processing is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y209), and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y211). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is held. The number-of-holds command corresponding to the special figure 1 number of reserves minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, special figure 1 changing state is set (addition of information) in the special figure status area (step Y212), special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y213), and special figure 1 normal processing is terminated. . Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 indicates that the special gaming state based on the jackpot is in progress. The status 5 shows that the game is in the small hit gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit, to the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 2 is not capable of starting to change (step Y221; N), the process proceeds to step Y234. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is a special figure based on the winning when the normal variable winning device 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. FIG. 2 Temporarily occurs in order to perform the start process of the variable display game, and does not hold the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (whether or not it is a specific gaming state) is prepared (step Y223). Command setting processing is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y227), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y228). Then, when the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y228; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y229). If special figure 1 is not changing (step Y229; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y230), and if not started (step Y230; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings.

  In the processing related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y231), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y232). Command setting processing is performed (step Y233), and the process proceeds to step Y234. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a change start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state in the effect control device 300.

  In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

  Then, “0”, which is the special figure 2 routine process number, is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y 234), and the special figure 2 routine process number set in the special figure 2 game process number area is saved. (Step Y235). Further, a flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y236), and a flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y237). 1 Regular processing ends. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y228; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y229; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y230; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step Y234.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting information or jackpot information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the fluctuation pattern setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set ( Step Y245).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, the electric support change count updating process for managing the period of the specific game state is performed (step Y248), and the special figure 1 change start process is ended.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 ordinary process. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the jackpot information is obtained as result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Alternatively, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set ( Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, an electric support change count update process for managing the period of the specific game state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 change start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y271). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y272), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y273). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y274), and if it is a big hit (step Y274; Y), the big hit flag 1 is set. End the process. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y274; N), a big hit determination process (step Y275) is performed for determining whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y275) is not a big hit (step Y276; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information saved in step Y271 remains. When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y275) is a big hit (step Y276; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271 (step Y277). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 53 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the big hit flag 2 area is saved with the small hit information (step Y291), and the big hit random number is stored from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step Y292). The special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y293).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y294). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y294; Y), the big hit flag 2 is set. End the process. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y294; N), a big hit determination process (step Y295) is performed for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y295) is not a big hit (step Y296; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the small hit information saved in step Y291 remains. When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y295) is a big hit (step Y296; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the small hit information is saved in step Y291 (step Y291). Y297), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 54 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y275 and Y295) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (step Y311). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y311; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y313), and the big hit determination processing is terminated. Note that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery is lost. Therefore, in the case of the special figure 2 variable display game in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is a small hit by shifting to the big win lottery.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y311; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value of the big hit determination value (step Y312). Then, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y313), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y312; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step Y314), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this processing. In addition, the special result (big hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game that the special figure 1 variable display game stop symbol is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result may be forcibly changed to a result of being off.

  After that, a big hit stop symbol information table corresponding to the game mode flag (a flag indicating whether or not the game state is a specific game state, etc.) is set (step Y335), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. 1 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the time. Save to the shortening determination data area (step Y338). Then, the special figure 1 big hit is saved in the special figure fluctuation information area (step Y339), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y343).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y340), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. (Step Y341). Then, the special figure 1 deviation is saved in the special figure fluctuation information area (step Y342), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y343). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y344), and the effect command setting process (step Y345) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y346), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y347). 1 Stops the symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed on the special figure 2. In the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special figure (big hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game that saves the special figure 2 variable display game stop symbol in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result may be forcibly changed to a result of being off.

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table corresponding to the game mode flag (a flag indicating whether or not the game state is in a specific game state) is set (step Y365), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. The special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area is saved (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the time. Save in the shortening determination data area (step Y368). Then, the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the special figure fluctuation information area (step Y369), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y378).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special symbol 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. After that, a special figure 2 small hit stop symbol information table corresponding to the game mode flag (a flag indicating whether or not the game state is in a specific game state) is set (step Y373), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Then, it is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y374).

  Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data region (step Y376), and the special symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol variation information region ( Step Y377), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step Y378). In the case of a small hit in a specific gaming state, time saving data is saved as time reduction determination data, and information on the time saving mode time small hit is saved as special figure information. In addition, in the case of a small hit without being in a specific gaming state, timeless data is saved as time reduction determination data, and normal time small hit information is saved as special figure information. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y379), and the effect command setting process (step Y380) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y381), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y382), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y383), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure information setting process (steps Y244 and Y264) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric support mode (specific gaming state) is being performed (step Y401). When determining whether or not the electric support mode is in effect, the determination may be made based on whether or not the information (flag) indicating the electric support mode is set, or depending on the presence or absence of an electric support final variation flag described later. It may be determined. When not in the power support mode (step Y401; N), a normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step Y402), and the process proceeds to step Y404. On the other hand, if it is in the electric support mode (step Y401; Y), the fluctuation pattern selection group information table in the electric support mode is set (step Y403), and the process proceeds to step Y404.

  If the target stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step Y404; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, 1 is set as the number-of-holds information (step Y405), and the process proceeds to step Y407. . In the case of a big hit or a small hit, it is handled that the number of holds is 1 in order to perform the distribution of fluctuation patterns that are not affected by the number of holds. If the target stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step Y404; Y), the special figure 1 hold number is loaded as the hold number information (step Y406), and the process proceeds to step Y407. It should be noted that only the special figure 1 variable display game has a gap as the stop symbol pattern.

  Then, the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the hold number information is acquired and saved as fluctuation distribution information 1 in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y407). The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer created based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the number-of-holds information and the game state information (whether or not it is in a specific game state). Further, a distribution base pointer table is set (step Y408), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step Y409). Thereafter, the acquired value is saved as the fluctuation distribution information 2 in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y410), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer created based on the stop symbol pattern.

  By setting the fluctuation distribution information 1 as described above, it becomes possible to vary the fluctuation time or the like depending on whether or not it is in the electric support mode (specific game state). For example, it is possible to select a variation time in the range of 30 to 1800 seconds for a special figure variation display game that is performed for the first time after entering the specific game state after the end of the special game state. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game state is the specific game state, it is possible to set a shorter change time than when it is not the specific game state.

  When a special gaming state occurs, the big hit symbol random number or small hit symbol random number of the special figure variable display game that triggered the special gaming state is stored, and after the special gaming state ends, the specific gaming state Thus, for the special figure variation display game played for the first time, the variation time may be set in consideration of the big hit symbol random number or the small hit symbol random number that triggered the occurrence of the special gaming state. That is, the game control means (game control device 100) may select the execution time of the variable display game that is first started after the special game state is ended based on the type of special result.

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the variation pattern setting process (steps Y246 and Y266) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In this variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared (step Y453). For the special figure 1 variation display game, since the variation pattern random number 1 is extracted and stored when the first start memory is generated, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). To do. For the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern random number 1 is extracted in this process. For the special figure 1 variable display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is extracted when the first start memory is generated in order to perform the prefetch process, but for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the prefetch process is not performed. 1 is extracted. Also, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 in steps Y456 and Y462 are also extracted and stored for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game when the first start memory is generated. ) To load. In addition, for the special figure 2 variable display game, a variable pattern random number is extracted in this process.

  Next, a 2-byte sorting process is performed (step Y454), the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step Y455), and the target variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared. (Step Y456). Then, a sorting process (step Y457) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y458). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y459), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y460). The address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y461), and the target variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared (step Y462).

  Thereafter, a sorting process (step Y463) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y464), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the variation display game started from now is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 59 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared second-half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. Since there is no need for distribution in the variation group table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step Y502; N), the first sorting value specified in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step Y505 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 60 shows the distribution process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code with no sorting (step Y512; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step Y513 from the loaded random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step Y514), and then the calculation It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step Y513, after the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step Y517), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the change start information setting process (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process and special figure 2 change start process. In this variation start information setting process, it is first determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), the process proceeds to step Y553. . If the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) of the fluctuation pattern random number in FIG. 1 is cleared (step Y552). Note that the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in FIG. 2 are extracted at the time of lottery of the fluctuation patterns and are not stored in the random number storage area, so that the clearing process is not performed here.

  Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y553), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y554). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y555), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y556). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y557), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y558).

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step Y559), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step Y560), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y561). ). Next, it is determined whether the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step Y562). If the information in FIG. 1 is not being set (step Y562; N), the variation start information setting process is terminated. If the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step Y562; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y563), and the contents of the random number storage area in FIG. 1 are shifted (step Y564). ) Clears the free area after the shift (step Y565), and ends the change start information setting process.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information on the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. First determination means that can be determined at the time of starting (before the start). Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the predetermined random number, the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and A second determination unit is provided that can determine the variation mode information when the second variation display game is started (before the start). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. It should be noted that the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variation display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variation display game from the entire special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination unit. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and the variation time has elapsed, It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

[Electric support change count update processing]
FIG. 62 shows the electric support fluctuation frequency update process (steps Y248 and Y268) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this electric support change count update process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric support mode (specific gaming state) is in effect (step Y581). finish. Further, when the electric support mode is in progress (step Y581; Y), the electric support change number for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game to be set to the electric support mode is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the electric support change number is changed. It is determined whether it is 0 (step Y583).

  When the electric support fluctuation number is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, when the electric support mode is continued, the electric support fluctuation number update process is terminated. In addition, when the electric support change frequency is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the electric support mode is ended, the electric support final change flag corresponding to the symbol for starting the change is set (step Y584). The fluctuation number update process is terminated. Note that in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the electric support mode is until one special figure variation display game is executed, and therefore the processing of steps Y582 and Y583 may be omitted.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the electric support mode is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special gaming state is finished, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are set. Can be executed at the same time, the power support variation frequency update process for managing the number of times of the power support mode is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. As described above, since the electric sapo change frequency update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game for the last special figure fluctuation display game for which the lottery is performed in the electric support mode is performed. Some have already finished the electric support mode. Therefore, if another process refers to the actual gaming state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the process may be performed as if it is not in the electric support mode, which may cause inconvenience. There is. Therefore, the special support fluctuation display game is set with the electric support final change flag so that it can be handled as a game running in the electric support mode. The electric support final change flag is information that can determine whether the last special figure change display game for which the lottery is performed in the electric support mode is the special figure 1 change display game or the special figure 2 change display game. Contains.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y213) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y227) in the special figure 2 ordinary process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts when all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state in which all the segments are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started at least from the state in which the segment is lit. You may make it do. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on. Moreover, the lighting mode at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation by the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same, and may differ.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y622), and an effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y626). As the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 variable display game set here, a display time of 600 ms is set in the case of loss and 2000 ms in the case of big hit.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a deviation, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a deviation (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is out of place (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. If the special figure 1 is not out of step (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; N), the process proceeds to step Y637. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step Y629). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the loss based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is only in this case that the special figure 2 variable display game is lost. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. When the special figure 2 display processing is not in progress (step Y629; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y630). Next, the display time of the special figure 1 set as described above + the display time of 4 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, an off symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 is prepared (step Y632), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y633). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y634), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y635), and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y636).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y637), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y638), information is loaded from the special figure 1 big prize opening information area and saved in the big prize opening information area (step Y639).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y640), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y641). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y656). As the display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 variable display game set here, a display time of 600 ms is set for the small hit and 2000 ms is set for the big win.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y657). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y657; N), the process proceeds to step Y670. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y657; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit game, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y658). ).

  If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y658; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y667), and a decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y668). An effect command setting process (step Y669) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y670.

  That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game ends at the small hit game state (when it does not flow into the specific area) or at the end of the special game state that is continued after the small hit game state (when it flows into the specific area) It will be resumed.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 big hit (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y659). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y661. When the special figure 2 display processing is not in progress (step Y659; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y660). Next, the display time of the special figure 2 + 4 ms set above as the special figure 1 display time is set in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y661). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, an off symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 is prepared (step Y662), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y663). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y664), a production command setting process is performed (step Y665), a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y666), and the process proceeds to step Y670. To do.

  After that, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y670), whether the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y672), information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening information area and saved in the large winning opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y641) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 2 game process number “2” relating to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 69 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y666) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y704).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information for setting a result of the deviation is set. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area is cleared (step Y707), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y708). By clearing the big hit flag 1 area, the deviation information is set in the big hit flag 1. Then, the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y709), the shift symbol number is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step Y710), and the special symbol 1 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 70 shows the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 2 (step Y636) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 A stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and thereafter, setting of information for obtaining a result of losing is performed. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area is cleared (step Y727), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y728). Note that by clearing the big hit flag 2 area, the deviation information is set in the big hit flag 2. Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y729), the shift symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y730), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

  With the processes in FIGS. 65 to 70 described above, when one of the special figure variation display games has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is interrupted or forcibly stopped by the result. Here, based on the fact that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, an end control process for forcibly stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with the result of disengagement is performed. Also, the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display game is resumed after the small hit game state is ended. Control is made. If the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and a game ball flows into a specific area, the special figure 1 variable display game that was interrupted when the special game state ends will be forcibly removed. Termination control processing for stopping is performed.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
FIG. 71 shows the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y753). If it is not a big hit (step Y753; N), the process proceeds to step Y769. In the case of a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The medium signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

  Then, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y755), and the round number upper limit value (16 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y756). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y757).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol command area and prepared (step Y758), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y759). Thereafter, a big hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y760), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y761).

  Next, the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y762). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y762, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than one 2R electric support, and is turned on when it is one 2R electric support in a specific gaming state, and in the normal gaming state It is turned OFF when it is 2R electric support at 1 time. The big hit 3 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than one 2R electric support, and is turned OFF when the 2R electric support is once in a specific gaming state, and in the normal gaming state. It is turned ON when the 2R electric support is performed once.

  Thereafter, the jackpot fanfare time is set (step Y763), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y764). Then, the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the round number area (step Y765), 3 is set as the process number (step Y766), and it is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y767). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y768) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit at step Y753 (step Y753; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is out-of-game information, it is an electric support final fluctuation, that is, the special figure fluctuation display game ends. Determines whether the specific gaming state is finished (step Y769).

  When it is not the electric support final fluctuation (step Y769; N), the process proceeds to step Y781. If it is the electric support final variation (step Y769; Y), a signal related to the end of the electric support is saved in the external information output data area (step Y770). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to OFF. Further, a signal relating to the end of the electric support is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y771). Here, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

  Then, the normal state number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y772), the normal figure low probability & no time limit flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step Y773), and the special figure game mode flag area The normal medium flag is saved in (Step Y774). Further, a probability information command (normal) is prepared (step Y775), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y776).

  Next, the probability information command (normal) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y777), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y778). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG. Further, a signal related to the left hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y779). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y780). As a result, the second game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  After that, the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y781), 0 is set as the process number (step Y782), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area. (Step Y783), the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
72 and 73 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared. (Step Y812). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit information (step Y813). If it is not a big hit (step Y813; N), the process proceeds to step Y829. Also, in the case of a big hit (step Y813; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 2 variable display game big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y814).

  Thereafter, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y815), the round number upper limit value (16 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step Y816). ). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y817).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y818), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y819). Thereafter, a big hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y820), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y821).

  Next, the signal corresponding to the status of the winning prize opening information and the probability is saved in the external information output data area (step Y822). In the present embodiment, in step Y822, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the big hit type of the special figure 2 variable display game is only 16R electric support once, so here, the big hit signals 2 and 3 are both ON.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y823), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y824). Then, the initial value (0 in this case) is saved in the round number area (step Y825), 3 is set as the process number (step Y826), and it is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y827). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y828) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Y813 that the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y813; N), the process moves to FIG. 73 to determine whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y829). Then, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y829; Y), it is determined whether it is the electric support final fluctuation, that is, whether the specific gaming state is ended by the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (step). Y830).

  When it is not the electric support final fluctuation (step Y830; N), the process proceeds to step Y839. If it is the electric support final change (step Y830; Y), a signal related to the end of the electric support is saved in the external information output data area (step Y831). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to OFF. Further, a signal related to the end of the electric support is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y832). Here, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

  Then, the normal state number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y833), the normal figure low probability & no time limit flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step Y834), and the special figure game mode flag area The normal medium flag is saved in (Step Y835). Further, a probability information command (normal) is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y837), and the probability information command (normal) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y838).

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y841), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y842). Then, during the special figure status area change in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y843), and the small hitting information is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y844).

  Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y845). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y846). As a result, the second game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made. Thereafter, a small hit release pre-process transition setting process is performed (step Y847), and the special figure 2 changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y829, if special figure 2 is not a small hit (step Y829; N), that is, if big hit flag 2 is out-of-game information, clearing special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction). (Step Y848), 0 is set as the process number (Step Y849), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (Step Y850), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game is lost only when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the loss.

  That is, the first special gaming state (special gaming state) in which the game control device 100 opens the special variation winning device with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has reached the first special result (big hit). The second special game generating means for generating a special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has a second special result (small hit). Second special game generating means for generating a game state (small hit game state) is provided.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
74 shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (steps Y768 and Y828) in the above-described special figure 1 display process and special figure 2 display process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big hit 1 signal that is output in the big hit or the small hit is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal that is output in the big hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the electric support (specific game state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the normal number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y873), and the probability information command (normal) is sent to the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. Save (step Y875), and clear the electric support change frequency area for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in the electric support mode (specific game state) (step Y876).

  Next, the ordinary figure low probability & short time flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step Y877), the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the electric support last variation flag area is saved. Clear (step Y879). Further, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the lower large prize opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y882), and the illegal monitoring period non-monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y883). Next, as a setting of information related to the function for changing the variation time of the normal map change display game in the specific game state, 0 indicating that the electronic support mode is not set is saved in the general drawing effect mode number area (step Y884). The figure effect timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885). Further, a non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step Y886), an acceleration function information command indicating a normal state is prepared (step Y887), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y888), and the fanfare / interval The middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small open release pre-processing transition setting process]
FIG. 75 shows the small hit release pre-process transition setting process (step Y847) in the above-described special figure 2 display process. In this small hit release pre-process transition setting process, first, “3” related to the small hit release pre-processing is set as a process number (step Y891), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y891). Step Y892).

  Next, the time before the small hit release (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y894). . Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON. Thereafter, in order to set the operation in the small hit gaming state, the small hit operation number is saved in the control number of the solenoid control area (step Y895), and the initial value is saved in the table pointer in the solenoid control area (step Y896). ). Further, the control timer in the solenoid control area is cleared to 0 (step Y897), and the small hit pre-release process transition setting process is terminated.

[Pre-treatment for opening small hits]
Next, details of the small hit release pre-processing (step Y143) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the small hit pre-release process, first, 4 is set as the process number for the small hit release process (step Y901), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y902). ).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y904). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON, the condition device operating region 1 effective signal is set to ON, and the accessory continuous operating device operating region 1 effective signal is set to ON. Then, the on-data is saved in the upper big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y905), and the upper big prize opening count number area for counting the number of game balls to be won in the first special variable prize winning device 38 is cleared ( Step Y906).

  Next, the number of small hits is saved in the game state display number area (step Y907), and the upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step Y908). Then, a fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the upper prize winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y909), and the small hit release pre-processing is terminated.

[Processing when small hits are open]
FIG. 77 shows the small hit releasing process (step Y144) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the small hit release process, first, 5 is set as the process number for the small hit remaining ball process (step Y911), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y912). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (3000 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y913), and the off data is saved in the upper prize winning solenoid output data area (step Y914). The process during hitting is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
FIG. 78 shows the small hit remaining ball process (step Y145) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In this small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether a residual sphere error is occurring (step Y921). If a residual sphere error is occurring (step Y921; Y), the process proceeds to step Y923. If no remaining sphere error is occurring (step Y921; N), it is determined whether the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step Y922). When the remaining sphere counter is not 0 (step Y922; N), the small hit remaining sphere process is terminated. When the remaining sphere counter is 0 (step Y922; Y), a process for ending the small hit after step Y923 is performed.

  In other words, after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, a process for ending the small hit is performed. However, if there is a residual ball error in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) since the last flow of the game ball into the first special variation winning device 38, the time required for the discharge As a result, the process shifts to a process for ending the small hit. Of course, when there is a remaining ball error, the process may not be shifted to the process for ending the small hit. Therefore, the process of step Y921 may not be performed.

  In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not a specific area has passed (step Y923). When a game ball flows into and passes through the specific area, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not the specific area has passed based on the presence or absence of the specific area passing flag. If there is a passage through the specific area (step Y923; Y), the process proceeds to step Y937 to perform processing for generating a special gaming state. When there is no passage through the specific area (step Y923; N), the process proceeds to step Y924 to complete the small hit gaming state and execute a process for making it possible to execute the special figure variation display game.

  In the process for ending the small hit gaming state after step Y924 and enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed, 0 is set as the process number for the special figure 2 normal process (step Y924), and the special figure 2 game is executed. The process number is saved in the process number area (step Y925). Next, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is cleared (step Y926), a decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y927), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y928). As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is resumed.

  Thereafter, the small hitting information in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y929), and a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y930). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF, the condition device operating region 1 effective signal is set to OFF, and the accessory continuous operating device operating region 1 effective signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the upper prize winning count area is cleared (step Y931), off-data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step Y932), and the normal operation number is saved in the control number of the solenoid control area (step Y932). Y933). Then, the initial value is saved in the table pointer in the solenoid control area (step Y934), and the control timer in the solenoid control area is cleared to 0 (step Y935). Further, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y936), and the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. The small hit gaming state is completed by the above processing. If the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it will be resumed.

  That is, the game control device 100 is controlled by one of the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the other variation display game is being performed, when the other variation display game whose execution control is being performed by the other variation display game execution control means is a small hit, After the interruption and the small hit game state based on the other variation display game is ended, a restart control means capable of executing a resumption control for resuming the one variation display game suspended.

  On the other hand, when there is a passage through the specific area (step Y923; Y) and processing for generating a special game state after step Y937 is performed, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area and prepared (step Y937). Setting processing is performed (step Y938). Next, a V big hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y939), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y940).

  After that, the signal related to the start of big hit (V big hit) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y941), and the test signal related to the start of big hit (V big hit) is turned ON, for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, The operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y942).

  Then, the big hit number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y943), the round number upper limit table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (this embodiment) 16) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step Y945). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946), and an initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step Y947). Although 16 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, since the small hitting operation corresponds to the first round, setting 1 as the initial number of rounds will release 15 rounds in the special game state. I am doing so.

  Thereafter, 6 for the fanfare / interval process is set as the process number (step Y948) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y949). Further, the V big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y950), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y951) is performed, and the small hit remaining ball process is terminated. With the above processing, the small hit gaming state is ended and the special gaming state is started.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
FIG. 79 shows fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare / interval process, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y971), and a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y972), and the effect command setting process (Step Y973).

  Next, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y974), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y975). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y975; Y), 4 is set as the process number (step Y976), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y977), The opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y978).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit of Special Figure 1 (step Y975; N), that is, if it is a big hit of Special Figure 2, 7 is set as the process number (Step Y979), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. Then (step Y980), the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y981). In the small hit game state, a case where a game ball flows into a specific area and becomes a big hit (V big hit) is also a big hit shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a signal regarding the start of opening the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y982). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the lower big prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y983), and the number of wins to the lower big prize opening is counted. The lower number of winning prizes is cleared (step Y984), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

[Processing during opening of Shimodai prize opening]
FIG. 80 shows the lower large prize opening opening process (steps Y112, Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this lower big prize opening opening process, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y1001). If it is not the final round (step Y1001; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1002), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1001; Y), the variation time information that is the variation time information of the first special figure 1 variation display game started after the end of the special game state is cleared to 0 (step Y1003). ), It is determined whether the time reduction determination flag is data with time reduction (step Y1004).

  If the time reduction determination flag is not timed and not data (step Y1004; N), that is, if the specific gaming state (electric support mode) is not reached after the special gaming state ends, the process proceeds to step Y1007. When the time reduction determination flag is data with time reduction (step Y1004; Y), that is, when the special gaming state (electric support mode) is entered after the end of the special gaming state, the special figure 1 is held (first start memory). It is determined whether there is any (step Y1005).

  If there is no special figure 1 hold (step Y1005; N), the process proceeds to step Y1007. Also, when there is a special figure 1 hold (step Y1005; Y), the fluctuation time for obtaining the fluctuation time information that is the fluctuation time information of the first special figure 1 fluctuation display game started after the end of the special gaming state. Prefetch processing is performed (step Y1006), and the process proceeds to step Y1007. Then, an ending command corresponding to the variable time information set in the variable time look-ahead process is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1008).

  The variation time of the first special figure 1 variable display game that is started after the end of the special game state is a reference for the duration of the specific game state. The length of the gaming state can be suggested and notified. When the special gaming state (electric support mode) is not entered after the special gaming state ends (step Y1004; N) or when there is no first start memory (step Y1006; N), 0 is set as the variable time information. In this case, the ending does not include information on the variable time information.

  Thereafter, the winning ball opening information and the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y1009), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1010). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1010; Y), 5 is set as the process number for the winning ball remaining ball process (step Y1011), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1011). Step Y1012). Further, the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1013), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1017), and the processing for releasing the lower special winning opening is completed. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1010; N), that is, if it is a big hit of special figure 2, 8 is set as the process number for the winning prize remaining ball process (step Y1014), and the process number is set. It is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1015). Further, the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1016), the off-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1017), and the processing for releasing the lower special winning opening is completed. To do. In the small hit game state, a case where a game ball flows into a specific area and becomes a big hit (V big hit) is also a big hit shown in FIG.

[Fluctuation time look-ahead processing]
FIG. 81 shows the variable time look-ahead process (step Y1006) in the above-described lower large prize opening opening process. In this variable time prefetching process, first, a random number (for holding 1 here) is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (step Y1021), and the big hit is determined by whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not (step Y1022).

  If the determination result is a big hit (step Y1023; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step Y1024), and the big hit symbol random number is stored from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding 1 here). Load (step Y1025). Next, stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step Y1026), and the process proceeds to step Y1028. If the determination result is not a big hit (step Y1023; N), stop symbol information at the time of loss is set (step Y1027), and the process proceeds to step Y1028.

  Thereafter, information for performing fluctuation determination in the electric support mode is set (step Y1028), and special figure information setting processing (step Y1029) is performed. Further, a fluctuation pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern random number storage area (here, for hold 1) (step Y1030), and a special figure fluctuation pattern setting process is performed (step Y1031). Then, variation time information is set from the first half variation number and the second half variation number (step Y1032), and the variation time prefetching process is terminated.

  The big hit determination process in step X1022, the special figure information setting process in step X1029, and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step X1031 are executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 process. It is the same as the processing to be performed.

  With the above processing, the variation time of the first special figure 1 variation display game started after the end of the special gaming state can be acquired, and the variation time can be suggested and notified by ending.

[Processing of remaining balls at Shimodai prize opening]
FIG. 82 shows the lower major winning opening remaining ball process (steps Y113 and Y148) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this lower ball winning ball remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), 3 is set as the process number (step Y1044), and the process proceeds to step Y1053.

  The interval period between rounds is a period from when the remaining sphere processing time elapses from the end of the round to when the interval time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. In this interval period, an interval effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), a signal related to the completion of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1045). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the information of the lower major winning unit count number area for storing the number of winnings to the lower major winning prize is cleared (step Y1046), and the information of the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared ( In step Y1047), information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1048).

  Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1049), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. Information is cleared (step Y1050). Further, the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1051), 6 is set as the process number (step Y1052), and the process proceeds to step Y1053.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1053). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1053; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1054), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1054). Y1055), the lower university winning mouth remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1053; N), the process number is incremented by +3 (step Y1056), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1057). Further, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1058), and the lower major prize winning port remaining ball process is terminated. In the small hit game state, a case where a game ball flows into a specific area and becomes a big hit (V big hit) is also a big hit shown in FIG.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is a period from the end of the final round until the ending time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. In this ending period, an ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like.

[Big hits end processing]
FIG. 83 shows the jackpot ending process (steps Y114 and Y149) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this big hit end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination flag is data with time reduction (step Y1041). If the time reduction determination flag is not timed and not data (step Y1041; N), that is, if the specific game state (electric support mode) is not reached after the special game state ends, the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1042), step The process proceeds to Y1044. Further, when the time reduction determination flag is data with time reduction (step Y1041; Y), that is, when the specific gaming state (electric support mode) is entered after the special gaming state ends, the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step Y1043). ), The process proceeds to step Y1044.

  Next, a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step Y1044), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1045). Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step Y1046), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1047). Further, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1048), and the big hit information in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y1049). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  Next, 0 is set as the process number (step Y1050), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1051). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1051; Y), the special figure 1 game process number area process number is saved (step Y1052), and the big hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1051; N), the special figure 2 game process number area process number is saved (step Y1053), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. (Step Y1054).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1054; N), the jackpot ending process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (step Y1054; Y), the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed from the result and stopped. In addition, in the case of performing the process of forcibly losing the suspended special figure 1 variable display game in the big hit ending process and stopping with the result, the game ball flows into a specific area in the small hit gaming state and the big hit is made (V big hit) only.

  In the process of forcibly stopping the suspended special figure 1 variable display game with the result of losing, the special figure 1 game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y1055), and the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step S10). Y1056). Then, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y1057), and the special figure 1 round upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y1058).

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big opening opening information area is cleared (step Y1059), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y1060). By clearing the big hit flag 1 area, the deviation information is set in the big hit flag 1. Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y1061), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y1062), and the big hit ending process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 84 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1042) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the jackpot end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1071). Here, the big hit 1-4 signals are set to OFF. Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1072). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal, the special symbol 2 signal and the launch position designation signal 1 are set to OFF. Next, the normal number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1073), and the low-probability & short-time flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1074). The normal medium flag is saved in the area (step Y1075).

  Next, a probability information command (during normal operation) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1076), and an electric support for managing the number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in the electric support mode (specific game state). The variation count area is cleared (step Y1077), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1078). Next, as a setting of information related to the function for changing the variation time of the normal map change display game in the specific game state, 0 indicating that the electronic support mode is not set is saved in the general drawing effect mode number area (step Y1079). The figure effect timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y1080). Further, a code without update is saved in the next mode transition information area (step Y1081), an acceleration function information command indicating a normal state is prepared (step Y1082), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1083), and a big hit end setting is performed. Process 1 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
FIG. 85 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1043) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the jackpot end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1091). Here, the big hit 1, 3, 4 signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1092). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF.

  Next, a signal relating to the start of time reduction (specific game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1093). Here, the big hit 2 signal is kept ON. Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of time reduction (specific game state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1094). Here, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal, and the launch position designation signal 1 are set to ON.

  Next, the number in the electric support mode (specific gaming state) is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1095), and the flag for high probability and shortage is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1096). Then, the electric support mode (specific game state) flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1097).

  Next, the probability information command (short time and medium) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1098), and the electric support for managing the number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in the electric support mode (specific game state). The electric support variation initial value (here, 1) is saved in the variation number area (step Y1099). Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1100).

  Furthermore, as a setting of information related to the function for changing the variation time of the normal map change display game in the specific gaming state, a general drawing effect mode information table corresponding to the time reduction determination data is set (step Y1101), and the normal drawing effect mode number is set. Is acquired and saved in the ordinary drawing effect mode number area (step Y1102). The common figure effect mode number is a number that defines the common figure pattern shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, and the time reduction determination data corresponds to the stop symbol number selected based on the big hit symbol random number or the small hit symbol random number. Is. The specific gaming state is when the big hit type is 16R electric support once or 2R electric support one time, or when it flows into a specific area based on the small hit, but this 16R electric support one time, 2R Each of the electric support and small hits corresponds to a large hit symbol random number or a plurality of stop symbols determined by the small hit symbol random number. The time shortening determination data includes information on these stop symbols. Based on this information, by setting a general drawing effect mode information table corresponding to any of the general symbol patterns A to E, the time shortening determination data can be used in accordance with the stop symbols. Any one of the usual patterns A to E is selected. Therefore, for example, even if the big hit type is 16R electric support once, the selected normal pattern may be different.

  The normal drawing effect mode number is for defining the variation time of the normal variation display game, and corresponds to four types of variation time, first variation time, second variation time, and third variation time when not in the electric support mode. There is a number, and at the start of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation time is set according to this ordinary figure effect mode number. The universal drawing production mode number to be set is defined in the universal drawing production mode information table. By changing the universal drawing production mode number in accordance with the provision of the universal drawing production mode information table, as shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. The change of the variable time is controlled.

  Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) of the normal drawing effect timer is acquired and saved in the normal drawing effect timer area (step Y1103), and next mode transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step Y1104). . Then, an acceleration function information command corresponding to the normal drawing effect mode number is prepared (step Y1105), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1106), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. By transmitting the acceleration function information command, it is possible to produce an effect related to the information on the variation time of the normal-variation display game.

  By performing the jackpot end process described above, the special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2. When the player makes a right game in the specific gaming state, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed, but the special figure 1 is executed first after the special gaming state ends. It becomes a variable display game. For the special figure 1 variable display game, it is possible to store the first start memory that waits for the execution of the game. Start of the special figure 1 variable display game by winning the third start winning port 48 of the second distribution device 92, rather than the special figure 2 variable display game starting by winning the normal fluctuation winning device 37 through the display game This is because it is faster. Therefore, the special figure 1 variation display game is started first after the special gaming state is ended, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game defines the period of the specific gaming state.

  When the special game state jackpot ending process based on the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is saved. The start process for the above may be delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be processed by the same timer interruption. In other words, the second variation display game execution control means is the second variation display game execution control means until the first variation display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variation display game after the game control device 100 ends the special gaming state. You may provide the game process standby means which does not make it the state which can perform the process regarding the start of a two-variable display game.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 86 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y116 and Y151) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is changing (Step Y1401).

  If the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the control target symbol is acquired. -1 is updated (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing processing]
FIG. 87 shows the segment LED editing process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, the general-purpose memory display unit 75, the memory display unit 54, and the number of rounds at the time of big hit (opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) Round display unit 60 for displaying the number of times), first game state display unit 76 for notifying whether the game is in a specific gaming state (under normal power support), and strikes that are advantageous to the player among left strike (normal strike) and right strike Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the second gaming state display unit 77 for informing the player are made.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which the display mode in the general map storage display unit 75 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the general map hold number is acquired to obtain a segment. Save in the area (step X602). Next, the special figure 1 reservation number table in which the display mode in the memory display unit 54 is defined is set (step X603), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step S603). X604). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined (step X605), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606).

  Then, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display state on the first gaming state display unit 76 is defined is set (step X607), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step S607). X608). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display state on the second game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X609), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X610), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Solenoid control processing]
FIG. 88 shows the solenoid control process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this solenoid control process, the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38 is controlled. First, it is determined whether a small hit is being made (step X611). Here, during the small hit, it is a period during which the small hit open processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. When the small hit is not being made (step X611; N), the solenoid control process is terminated. If the small hit is being made (step X611; Y), if the control timer in the solenoid control area is not 0, -1 is updated (step X612), and it is determined whether the control timer in the solenoid control area is 0. (Step X613).

  And when the control timer of a solenoid control area is not 0 (step X613; N), a solenoid control process is complete | finished. If the control timer of the solenoid control area is 0 (step X613; Y), a solenoid control table corresponding to the control number of the solenoid control area is set (step X614). Next, a table address corresponding to the table pointer in the solenoid control area is calculated (step X615), the table pointer is acquired and saved in the table pointer in the solenoid control area (step X616).

  Thereafter, the control timer is acquired and saved in the control timer in the solenoid control area (step X617), the output data is acquired and saved in the solenoid output data area (step X618), and the solenoid control process is terminated. With the above processing, the operation of the lever solenoid as shown in FIG. 9 is controlled.

[Unauthorized monitoring process]
FIG. 89 shows the fraud monitoring process (step X116) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this fraud monitoring process, first, it is determined whether an error or fraud is occurring (step X621). Here, the waiting state for release based on vibration fraud due to vibration applied to the gaming machine, the waiting state for release based on magnet fraud due to detection of abnormal magnetism, radio wave fraud due to detection of abnormal radio waves, first special If any one of the waiting states for release based on an abnormality relating to the number of game balls remaining in the variable winning device 38 is applicable, it is determined that an error or fraud has occurred. If an error / illegal occurrence is occurring, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set.

  If an error or fraud has occurred (step X621; Y), it is determined whether the initialization switch is on (step X622). If the initialization switch is not on (step X622; N), the fraud monitoring process is terminated. When the initialization switch is on (step X622; Y), processing for canceling the error after step Y623 is performed. In other words, if an error or fraud is occurring, it cannot be canceled unless the initialization switch 112 is operated. Therefore, it is not something that the player can cancel, and an operation by a store clerk of the game store is required. Here, the initialization switch 112 is monitored not by monitoring the input level of the initialization switch as when the power is turned on, but by monitoring the rising edge due to the operation of the initialization switch 112. In addition, processing such as initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed by the operation of the initialization switch 112 here.

  In the process of canceling the error that is performed when the initialization switch is ON (step X622; Y), first, an error / unauthorization notification end command is prepared (step X623), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X624). ). Next, the error / illegal flag is cleared (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the time during which abnormal magnetic detection continues is cleared (step X626). Furthermore, the vibration fraud monitoring timer that counts the time during which abnormal vibration detection continues is cleared (step X627), and it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step X628).

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step X628; N), the fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step X628; Y), a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step X629), an effect command setting process is performed (step X630), and the fraud monitoring process is terminated. With the above processing, the error is canceled and the game can be advanced.

  On the other hand, if no error or fraud has occurred (step X621; N), it is determined whether the frame (front frame 12 or glass frame 15) is being opened (step X631). When the frame is not being opened (step X631; N), the process proceeds to step X633. When the frame is being opened (step X631; Y), the initial value (3000 ms in this case) is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer, and the process proceeds to step X633. That is, even if a vibration is detected for a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) after the frame is closed, it is not illegal.

  Next, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X633), and it is determined whether the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is 0 (step X634). If the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not 0 (step X634; N), the vibration fraud monitoring timer that counts the time during which abnormal vibration detection continues is cleared to 0 (step X636), and the process proceeds to step X639. If the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is 0 (step X634; Y), it is determined whether the special electric accessory (first special variable winning device 38) is in operation (step X635).

  If the special electric accessory (first special variable winning device 38) is not in operation (step X635; N), the vibration fraud monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X636), and the process proceeds to step X639. When the special electric accessory (first special variable winning device 38) is in operation (step X635; Y), a vibration fraud monitoring table is prepared (step X637), and the target action (here, abnormal vibration) is prepared. ) Is performed (step X638), and the process proceeds to step X639.

  Information necessary for fraud check processing is defined in the vibration fraud monitoring table. For example, information for checking whether the vibration sensor 65 is on, vibration that measures the time during which abnormal vibration detection continues, and the like. The address of the fraud monitoring timer area, the sensor-on time value at which fraud is determined (4 ms in the case of the vibration sensor 65), and the fraud notification command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 when it is determined to be fraud are defined.

  The case where the special electric accessory (first special variable winning device 38) is in operation is in the small hit gaming state. The first special variation winning device 38 is provided with a specific area in which a special gaming state is generated by the inflow of game balls. Therefore, an illegal act of vibrating the gaming machine to flow into the specific area is monitored. ing.

  Thereafter, a magnet fraud monitoring table is prepared (step X639), and a fraud check process for monitoring the duration of the target action (abnormal magnetism here) is performed (step X640). Information necessary for fraud check processing is defined in the magnet fraud monitoring table. For example, information for checking whether the magnetic sensor 61 is on, or magnetism for measuring the time during which abnormal magnetism detection continues. The address of the fraud monitoring timer area, the sensor-on time value at which fraud is determined (32 ms for the magnetic sensor 61), and the fraud notification command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 when it is determined to be fraud are defined.

  Next, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X641). If the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X641; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X641; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined whether an error or fraud is occurring (step X642). If an error or fraud has occurred (step X642; Y), the fraud monitoring process is terminated. In this case, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set in any of the above fraud check processes (steps X638 and X640).

  If no error or fraud has occurred (step X642; N), a radio wave fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X643), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X644). Then, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set (step X645), and the fraud monitoring process is terminated. When an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is immediately determined as illegal.

[Injustice check processing]
FIG. 90 shows the fraud check process (steps X638 and X640) in the fraud monitoring process described above. In this fraud check process, first, it is determined whether or not the target sensor is on (step X651). The target sensor is the vibration sensor 65 in the case of the fraud check process performed in step X638, and the magnetic sensor 61 in the case of the fraud check process performed in step X638.

  If the target sensor is not on (step X651; N), the target fraud monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X657), and the fraud check process is terminated. In this case, there is a case in which the fraudulent behavior itself to be monitored has not occurred. If the target sensor is on (step X651; Y), the target fraud monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X652), and it is checked whether the target fraud monitoring timer value is smaller than the target fraud confirmation value. Determine (step X653).

  In the case of the fraud check process performed in step X638, the target fraud monitoring timer is a vibration fraud monitoring timer, and the target fraud confirmation value in this case is 4 ms. In the case of the fraud check process performed in step X638, the target fraud monitoring timer is a magnetic fraud monitoring timer, and the target fraud confirmation value in this case is 32 ms.

  If the value of the target fraud monitoring timer is smaller than the target fraud confirmation value (step X653; Y), the fraud check process ends. This is a case where it is not yet determined to be illegal. If the value of the target fraud monitoring timer is not smaller than the target fraud confirmation value (step X653; N), the target fraud notification command is acquired and prepared (step X654), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X655). Then, an error / illegal occurrence flag is set (step X656), and the fraud check process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that it is illegal. That is, regarding the magnetic sensor 61 and the vibration sensor 65, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 and the vibration sensor 65 are continuously on for a certain period.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 91 shows the external information editing process (step X117) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step X108), the fraud monitoring process (step X116), etc. Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a management device or a test firing test device and set it in the output buffer is performed.

  In this external information editing process, it is first determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the gaming machine error status signal OFF data is stored. Is saved in the test signal output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y), or when a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is displayed. The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 15 and the front frame 12 are opened is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X711), and the process goes to step X712. Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

  If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X711), and the process proceeds to step X712. On the other hand, if the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X709; N), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X712.

  And, the magnet fraud is occurring (step X712; Y), the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), the vibration fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), the lower prize winning fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), If it falls into at least one of the top college winning mouth fraud (Step X716; Y), the ordinary power fraud (Step X717; Y), or the illegal ball error (Step X718; Y), the security signal The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X719), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X720), and the process proceeds to step X721. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If no error has occurred in steps X712 to X718, the process proceeds to step X721.

  As shown in FIG. 92, during the occurrence of a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector (Step X721; Y), a remaining ball error in which a game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 (Step X722; If it corresponds to at least one of (Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X723), and the process proceeds to step X724. If no error has occurred in steps X721 and X722, the process proceeds to step X724.

  Thereafter, a start port 1 signal editing process (step X724) for editing the winning signals to the first start winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 48, and a start port 2 signal editing for editing the winning signal to the normal variation winning device 37 Processing (step X725) is performed. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X726) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X727), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 93 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X724) in the external information editing process described above. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. And it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

  If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output is output to the start port 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (eg, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the external information editing process described above is performed for the start port 2 signal in the same manner as the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 94 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X726) in the external information editing process described above. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X727) in the above-described external information editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is completed is 0. (Step X753).

  If the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination count signal output count is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main winning ball signal is output to the symbol determination count signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (256 ms in this case) of the symbol determination number signal (in this case, high level) and the time (in this case, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). It is time (here 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, the on-state time is 256 ms and the off-state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. Further, when the symbol determination frequency signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S753). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X756). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the usual game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step Z1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step Z2) is performed. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Z3). Note that the minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step Z4).

  If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step Z4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step Z5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step Z6). Then, a game branch process (step Z7) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step Z7, the fluctuation start of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal fluctuation process are performed. A usual figure process (step Z8) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step Z7, a process for changing the normal map (step Z9) for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map is performed.

  In step Z7, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether or not the time reduction state is in progress, A general map display process (step Z10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map processing is performed. If the game process number is “3” in step Z7, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step Z11) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step Z7, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step Z12) for setting the information necessary for performing the end process for the ordinary map is performed. If the game process number is “5” in step Z7, a normal figure end process (step Z13) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step Z8) is performed.

  After that, after preparing a general symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 74 (step Z14), the symbol variation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 74 ( Step Z15) is performed. Then, the ordinary drawing effect mode information check process is performed (step Z16), and the ordinary figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Z4 that the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (step Z4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Z14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step Z101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step Z101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (step Z102). The right-handed gaming state is a special gaming state, a small hit gaming state, or a specific gaming state. And when it is the game state which hits right (step Z102; Y), it transfers to step Z105. If the game state is not right-handed (step Z102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step Z103), an effect command setting process is performed (step Z104), and the process proceeds to step Z105.

  Next, the number of common chart holds is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than the upper limit (step Z105). If the number of reserved common maps is less than the upper limit (step Z105; Y), the number of reserved general maps is updated by +1 (step Z106), and the address of the per-random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general maps is calculated. (Step Z107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step Z108), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when it is determined in step Z101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step Z101; N), or when it is determined in step Z105 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step Z102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, the ordinary figure winning display 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations during the ordinary figure winning, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the hit state. It is determined whether there is any (step Z121). Then, when the normal map is being reached (step Z121; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step Z122), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step Z122; Y). If it is determined, the count of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step Z123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 9) (step Z124), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step Z124; Y). Then, the value of the operation end is saved in the control pointer area during normal hitting (step Z125). Then, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (step Z126), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined at step Z121 that the vehicle is not hitting the normal map (step Z121; N), when it is determined at step Z122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step Z122; N), or step Z124. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step Z124; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step Z8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of usual figure holds is 0 (step Z131). If the number of usual figure hold is 0 (step Z131; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step Z152) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (step Z131; N), the loaded random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM and the loaded area is cleared to 0 (step Z132). . Next, it is determined whether the probability of a hit result in the usual figure variation display game is a usual figure high probability that is higher than usual, that is, the electric support mode (specific game state) (step Z133).

  If it is not the time of the normal high probability (step Z133; N), the low probability lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the determination value at the time of the normal map low probability is set (step Z134), and the process proceeds to step Z136. Further, when the normal probability is high (step Z133; Y), the high probability lower limit determination value which is the lower limit value of the determination value at the normal probability is set (step Z135), and the process proceeds to step Z136.

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the determination value (step Z136). This upper limit judgment value is common to the ordinary figure high probability and the ordinary figure low probability. If the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step Z136; Y), the process proceeds to step Z138 on the assumption that the result is out of order. If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step Z136; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Z137). If the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Z137; Y), the process proceeds to step Z138 on the assumption that the result is out of place. If the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Z137; N), the process proceeds to step Z141 assuming that the result is winning. Here, the range of the hit random numbers is 0 to 251; the low probability lower limit determination value is 251; the high probability lower limit determination value is 238; and the upper limit determination value is 251. Therefore, the hit probability is 0/251 in the normal low probability state, and the hit probability is 13/251 in the normal high probability state.

  If it is determined that the result is out of order and the process proceeds to step Z138, information about the deviation is saved in the hit flag area (step Z138), and the figure stop symbol number is saved in the normal figure stop symbol area (step Z139). The information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (step Z140), and the process proceeds to step Z144. If the result is determined to be hit and the process proceeds to step Z141, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step Z141), and the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal figure stop symbol area (step Z142). The winning symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step Z143), and the process proceeds to step Z144.

  Thereafter, the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Z144), and the usual figure change time corresponding to the usual figure effect mode number is saved in the usual figure game processing timer area (step Z145). Here, as the normal time fluctuation time, if the normal time drawing mode number is a value (in this case, “0”) indicating that it is not in the specific gaming state, 10000 ms is set as the fluctuation time. If the value corresponds to the first variation time, the second variation time, or the third variation time shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variation time corresponding to the value is set. Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol number and the variation time is prepared (step Z146), and a command setting process (step Z147) is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step Z148), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step Z149), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step Z150). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one. Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step Z151) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 100 shows the process transition setting process (step Z151) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step Z161), and the process number is saved in the process number area for the normal game ( Step Z162). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal variable display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step Z163). Here, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is set to ON.

  Next, a changing flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is saved in the normal figure change control flag area (step Z164), and the blinking which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the common figure display 74 is displayed. The control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the usual flashing control timer area (step Z165). Then, the initial value is saved in the usual figure changing symbol number area (step Z166), and the usual figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the normal variation process (step Z9) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, in the process of changing the normal map, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process of displaying the normal map (step Z181), and the process number is set to the normal game process number. Save in the area (step Z182). After that, a normal map display time (for example, 600 ms) which is a display time of the result of the normal map variable display game on the general map display 74 is set (step Z183), and the normal map display time is set in the general game display timer area. (Step Z184). Further, a signal related to the end of fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Z185). Here, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is set to OFF. Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal-variation display game is stopped is saved in the normal-variation control flag area (step Z186), and the normal-variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, details of the processing for displaying a normal map (step Z10) in the above-described normal game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the processing for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (winning information or missed information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step Z201), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step Z202), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step Z203).

  If the winning flag is not winning information (step Z203; N), that is, if the winning flag is off, 0 is set as the processing number (step Z215), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step Z216). Control goes to step Z217.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step Z203; Y), that is, if it is a win, it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (in the specific gaming state) (step Z204). If the normal power support is not in progress (step Z204; N), the normal power open time (for example, 72 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step Z205). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the normal control pointer area per normal figure (step Z206), and the process proceeds to step Z209. Thereby, the release mode of the normal variation winning device 37 other than the specific gaming state is set.

  Further, when the ordinary power support is being performed (step Z204; Y), the ordinary power release time (for example, 200 ms) at the time of the ordinary power support is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step Z207). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the normal control pointer area per normal figure (step Z208), and the process proceeds to step Z209. Thereby, the release mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the specific gaming state is set. In addition, you may make it set an open | release aspect according to a common drawing production mode number. Moreover, if the normal drawing effect mode number is defined according to the combination of the variation time and the release mode, the variation time and the release mode can be individually changed.

  Thereafter, 3 is set as a process number for shifting to the normal game process (step Y209), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step Z210). Then, a signal related to the win in the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step Z211). Here, the normal signal per normal symbol 1 is set to ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Further, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the normal power solenoid (step Z212).

  Then, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step Z213), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period The information on the winning area is cleared (step Z214). After that, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step Z217), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Normal drawing mode information check process]
Next, details of the general drawing effect mode information check process (step Z16) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the ordinary drawing effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step Z221), and when it is a no-update code (step Z221; Y). Then, the ordinary drawing effect mode information check process is terminated. The no-update code is set when the electronic support mode is not set or when one of the usual patterns A, D, and E is set. In this case, the variation time does not change over time, that is, there is no update.

  If the code is not a no-update code (step Z221; N), if the ordinary drawing effect timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Z222), and it is determined whether the ordinary drawing effect timer is 0 (step Z223). If the ordinary drawing effect timer is not 0 (step Z223; N), the ordinary drawing effect mode information check process is terminated. If the ordinary drawing effect timer is 0 (step Z223; Y), the ordinary drawing effect mode information address table is set (step Y224), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step Z225). ).

  Further, the ordinary drawing production mode number is acquired and saved (step Z226), and the ordinary drawing production timer initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is obtained and saved (step Z227). Thereafter, the next mode transition information is acquired and saved (step Z228), an acceleration function information command corresponding to the ordinary drawing production mode number is prepared (step Z229), and production command setting processing is performed (step Z230). The normal drawing production mode information check process is terminated. With the above processing, the fluctuation time changes every predetermined time (30 seconds) in the case of the normal patterns B and C.

  In addition, while it was assumed that the set general-purpose pattern was repeated during the specific gaming state, all the periods specified in the general-purpose pattern have passed, and the general-purpose pattern has been completed (here, the total of two minutes is four periods) It is also possible to change the normal pattern to be set next based on the fact that it has passed. In this case, the general drawing production mode information table is changed based on the fact that the general drawing pattern has been completed.

  Moreover, in each usual pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game can be changed at every passage of the period (every 30 seconds), but the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game is changed depending on other conditions. Also good. For example, winning a separate lottery, derivation of a specific result in a special figure fluctuation display game or a general figure fluctuation display game, execution of a special figure fluctuation display game or a general figure fluctuation display game in a specific gaming state When the number of times reaches a predetermined value, the variation time of the normal variation display game may be changed. In this case, the special drawing effect mode number is changed based on the fact that the counter for counting the number of executions of the separate lottery, the derivation of a specific result, the special figure fluctuation display game or the general figure fluctuation display game reaches a predetermined value. To do. In addition, the ordinary drawing pattern mode itself may be changed by changing the ordinary drawing effect mode information table at these occasions.

  In addition, the operation mode (operation pattern) of the normal variation winning device 37 when the result of the normal map display game is a win may be changed. For example, the number of opening / closing operations when the result is successful, the time for opening, the timing for converting the open and closed states, and the like are changed. This also makes it possible to change the rate at which the normally variable winning device 37 is released per unit time in each period.

  From the above, the game control device 100 can divide the predetermined period for entering the specific gaming state into a plurality of periods and individually set the possibility of winning the normal variation winning device 37 in each period. It will be possible. In addition, the execution time of the normal fluctuation display game can be individually set for each period. In addition, the time during which the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state per certain unit time can be set individually for each period. In addition, an operation pattern in which the normal variation winning device 37 converts between an open state and a closed state can be individually set for each period.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step Z11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, the normal process per game is a process for controlling the drive of the normal solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. ing.

  In this normal processing for normal maps, first, a control pointer for normal maps is loaded and prepared (step Z301), and the value of the loaded control pointer for normal maps is the value in the upper limit value area for control pointers per normal map. It is determined whether or not (the value of hit end) has been reached (step Z302).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step Z302; Y), the process proceeds to step Z304. If the value of the control pointer during normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal map (step Z302; N), the control pointer during normal map is updated by +1 (step Z303), Control goes to step Z304.

  Then, branch processing according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step Z304). If the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 2, 4 and 6, the process proceeds to step Z305 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, and the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is changed. The waiting time after the blockage (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step Z305), and off data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (step Z306). ), End the process during the normal map.

  If the value of the control pointer is any one of 1, 3, 5, and 7, the routine proceeds to step Z307 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, and the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is reached. The normal power release time (for example, 200 ms) which is the open time of 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step Z307), and ON data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. (Step Z308), and the process during normal drawing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is 8, the process number is set to “4” in order to proceed to step Z309 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step Z12). "Is set (step Z309). Then, the processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step Z310), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step Z311). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step Z312), and the normal processing during normal drawing is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step Z12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the ordinary power remaining ball process, first, a process number “5” related to the end process per universal figure is set (step Z401), and the process number is saved in the ordinary game process number area (step Z401). Step Z402).

  Thereafter, the normal ending time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step Z403), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Z404). Here, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step Z405), the normal control pointer area is cleared per normal figure (step Z406), and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is performed. finish.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step Z13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the normal chart end process, first, a process number “0” related to the normal chart normal process is set (step Z501), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step Z501). Step Z502).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hitting of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step Z503). Here, the medium signal per normal symbol is set to OFF. Then, a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation prize winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step Z504), and the per-figure end processing is terminated.

  From the above, in a gaming machine including a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down and a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a start prize that allows a game ball to win in the game area 32 Normal variation winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won, and first special variation A first special variation prize-winning device 38 having a specific area into which a game ball can flow, and the game control means for winning at the start prize opening. Based on this, the variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state is generated in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 is converted to an open state. Control the end of the special gaming state Later, it is possible to control to set a specific gaming state in which the normal variation winning device 37 can be opened for a predetermined period of time, and based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 It is possible to control the 1 special variable winning device 38 to be converted to an open state, and a special gaming state is generated based on the flow of game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 into the specific area. The specific game state is started based on the end of the special game state, and is controlled to end based on the end of the variable display game first started after the end of the special game state. It becomes that. Therefore, the length of the period of the specific game state becomes dependent on the execution time of the variable display game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) selects a period during which the specific game state continues by selecting, from a plurality of values, the execution time of the variable display game that is first started after the end of the special game state. It will be like that. Therefore, since the length of the period of the specific game state changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) selects the execution time of the variable display game that starts first after the end of the special game state based on the type of special result. Therefore, since the length of the period of the specific game state changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in a gaming machine including a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down and a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a start winning opening (a first prize opening in which the game ball can win in the game area 32) A first start winning opening 36, a third starting winning opening 48), a normal variation winning device 37 and a first special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won. And the second special variable winning device 39, the first special variable winning device 38 includes a specific area into which a game ball can flow, and the game control means is based on the winning at the start winning port. The first variation display game execution means (game control device 100) for executing the variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and control so as to convert the normal variation prize winning device 37 to the open state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Regular variation winning device control The first special variable winning device control means (game control device 100) capable of converting the first special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the stage (game control device 100) and the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 When the result of the first variation display game becomes a special result, or when the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. Special game state generating means (game control device 100) for controlling to generate a special game state to be converted into a special game state in which the normal variable winning device 37 can be opened after the special game state is ended. Specific game state control means (game control device 100) that can be controlled so as to be set over a predetermined period in which the first variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times. Control means, so that by dividing a predetermined period of time becomes a specific gaming state into a plurality of periods, which is the potential for high to pay to ordinary variation winning device 37 can be set separately for each period. Therefore, the possibility of winning the normal variation winning device 37 changes, the possibility of occurrence of a special gaming state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) executes second variation display game execution means (game control) for executing the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning in the normal variation prize winning device 37. Device 100), and the first special variable winning device control means (game control device 100) has the result of the second variation display game executed based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 becomes the specific result. Thus, the first special variation winning device 38 is controlled to be converted to the open state. Therefore, game performance can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The game control means (game control device 100) includes third variation display game execution means (game control device 100) that executes a third variation display game (ordinary variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) controls the third variation display game to change the ordinary variation winning device 37 to the open state when the result of the third variation display game is the winning result, and the third The execution time of the variable display game can be set individually for each period. Therefore, the possibility of winning the normal variation winning device 37 changes, the possibility of occurrence of a special gaming state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) can individually set the time during which the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state per certain unit time. Therefore, the possibility of winning the normal variation winning device 37 changes, the possibility of occurrence of a special gaming state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) can individually set the operation pattern in which the normal variation winning device 37 converts between the open state and the closed state in each period. Therefore, the possibility of winning the normal variation winning device 37 changes, the possibility of occurrence of a special gaming state can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the period during which the specific gaming state lasts is until one special figure 1 variable display game is executed, but may be a plurality of special figure 1 variable display games. Also, based on a separate lottery, big hit type, big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, etc., the number of special figure variable display games that specify the duration of a specific game state (special figure variable display that can be executed in a specific game state) The number of games) may be selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the period of the specific gaming state is changed by changing the fluctuation time of the first special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the special gaming state. If the number of special figure variation display games to be defined can be selected, the period of the specific gaming state can be changed by the change of the number of times in addition to the change of the variation time. Further, the variation time of the special figure variation display game in the specific game state may be a constant value, and the period of the specific game state may be changed by changing only the number of times the game can be executed in the specific game state. Also, by making the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game executed in the specific gaming state a very long time (for example, 30 minutes or one hour), the specific gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit. You can also

  From the above, in a gaming machine including a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down and a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a start prize that allows a game ball to win in the game area 32 Normal variation winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won, and first special variation The first special variation winning device 38 includes a specific area into which a game ball can flow, and the game control means (game control device 100) is started. A special game in which a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed based on a winning at a winning opening, and the second special variable winning device 39 is converted to an open state when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Control to generate state After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to control to set a specific gaming state in which the normal variation winning device 37 can be opened for a predetermined period. Based on the winning of the ball, it is possible to control the first special variable winning device 38 to be converted to the open state, and based on the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 flowing into the specific area. It is configured to control so as to generate a special gaming state, and the specific gaming state is started based on the end of the special gaming state, and a predetermined plurality of variable display games are executed after the special gaming state is ended. Based on this, it is controlled so as to end. Therefore, the length of the period of the specific game state becomes dependent on the execution time of the variable display game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) selects the period in which the specific game state continues by selecting the number of times of the variable display game to be set to the specific game state from a plurality of values. Therefore, since the length of the period of the specific game state changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, the game control means (game control device 100) selects the number of variable display games to be in the specific game state based on the type of special result. Therefore, since the length of the period of the specific game state changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the performance of the game.

  FIG. 107 (a) shows an example of the transition of the effect mode. In this example, two types of effect modes of countdown zones 1 and 2 are provided in a specific gaming state (which may include a small hit gaming state). When the variation time of the first special figure 1 variable display game started after the end of the special gaming state is a predetermined time or more, that is, when the duration of the specific gaming state is a predetermined time or more, it becomes the countdown zone 1. If it is less than the predetermined time, the countdown zone 2 is set. By doing in this way, the production mode according to the length of a specific game state can be selected, and the interest of a specific production state can be improved.

  The distribution of the countdown zones 1 and 2 may be performed after the variation time is determined with the start of the first special figure 1 variation display game that is started after the special game state is ended. In addition, if there is a first start memory for executing the first special figure 1 variable display game started after the end of the special game state, the distribution may be performed before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. The distribution result may be suggested and notified before the end of the special gaming state.

  FIG. 107 (b) also shows an example of the transition of the effect mode. In this example, two types of effect modes of a countdown zone 1 and an extra zone are provided for a specific gaming state (which may include a small hit gaming state). In the specific game state, the user basically stays in the countdown zone and shifts to the extra zone based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  In the countdown zone, a display in which the remaining time of the specific gaming state is subtracted by the duration display 89 is performed. At the start of the specific gaming state, the remaining time of the specific gaming state is grasped and notified based on the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. At this time, a time shorter than the actual remaining time is notified. Then, when the predetermined timing is reached in the specific gaming state, the stage shifts to the additional zone, and the effect of adding time to the duration display 89 and the subtraction display on the duration display 89 are stopped so as to approach the actual remaining time. To. By doing in this way, the interest of a specific production state can be improved.

  FIG. 108 also shows an example of the transition of the effect mode. In this example, a safety zone can be set as an effect mode that can be set in a specific game state (may include a small hit game state) in addition to the effect mode shown in FIG. 107 (b). This safety zone is an effect mode in which the player can stay when the remaining time of the specific gaming state is sufficiently long, and the player can play the game without worrying about the remaining time. In this way, the interest of the specific performance state can be improved.

  Note that the period during which the specific gaming state lasts is until one special figure 1 variable display game is executed, but may be a plurality of special figure 1 variable display games. In this case, in the example of FIG. 107 (a), when the remaining number of the special figure 1 variable display game that can be executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it stays in the countdown zone 1 and counts down when it is less than the predetermined number You may make it stay in Zone 2. In the example of FIG. 107 (b), each time a new special figure 1 variable display game is started in the specific gaming state, the game moves to the additional zone and is newly started in the additional zone. An extra effect according to the fluctuation time may be performed. Further, in the example of FIG. 108, when the remaining number of special figure 1 variable display games that can be executed in a specific gaming state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the user may stay in the safety zone.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to notify whether or not it is possible to leave a seat in a specific gaming state whose period is defined by time.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the special start 2 variable display game can generate up to a predetermined upper limit number of second start memories for suspending the start of the game as in the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game can be executed without interruption in the specific game state. In this case, it is preferable to perform control so that the special figure variation display game that is first started after the end of the special gaming state is the special figure variation display game.

  As described above, the period of the specific gaming state is defined by the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, if the player wants to leave the seat in a situation where the specific gaming state and the special gaming state continue alternately, The period of the specific gaming state is consumed only for the time of sitting. And if the second start memory can be stored as in this modification, a big win may occur in the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory. It is necessary to leave the seat after waiting for all of the starting memory to be consumed, and more time is consumed.

  Therefore, for the second start memory, it is possible to execute a pre-reading process for making a determination before the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory is started, and when it is clear that no big hit occurs, this is indicated. Notification is made so that consumption during a specific gaming state due to leaving the seat can be minimized.

[Big hits end processing]
In this modification, the big hit end process shown in FIG. 109 is performed instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG. In the jackpot ending process, an on-hold information determination process (step Y1110) for performing a prefetch process for the second start-up memory is performed.

[Pending information judgment processing]
FIG. 110 shows the pending information determination process (step Y1110) in the above-described jackpot process. In this in-hold information determination process, first, the in-hold information is cleared to 0 (step Y1111). The pending hit information is information indicating whether or not there is a big hit in the currently stored second start memory, and indicates that there is no big hit by clearing 0 (no big hit information set) State).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game mode flag is the electric support mode flag (step Y1112). When the special figure game mode flag is not the electric support mode flag (step Y1112; N), a message command for break time corresponding to the on-hold hit information is prepared (step Y1121), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1122). ), The on-hold information determination process is terminated. In this case, since there is no jackpot information set as the pending hit information, a command including information to that effect is transmitted to the effect control device 300. On the basis of this information, the production control device 300 notifies that a break is possible. That is, in this case, it is a case where the specific gaming state is not reached, so there is no problem even if the user leaves the seat.

  When the special figure game mode flag is the electric support mode flag (step Y1112; Y), the head address of the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is set (step Y1113). Then, the special figure 2 hold number is loaded as a hold number counter (step Y1114), and it is determined whether the hold number counter is 0 (step Y1115).

  If the hold count counter is 0 (step Y1115; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1121. When the process proceeds from step Y1114, if the hold count counter is 0, the second start memory is 0. In this case, since there is no jackpot information set as the on-hold bonus information, a command including such information is transmitted to the effect control device 300. On the basis of this information, the production control device 300 notifies that a break is possible. That is, in this case, since the special figure 2 variable display game is not executed, there is no possibility of being a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, and there is no problem even if the user leaves the seat.

  If the hold number counter is not 0 (step Y1115; N), a big hit random number is loaded from the area corresponding to the hold counter (step Y1116), a big hit determination process is performed (step Y1117), and the result is a big hit. Is determined (step Y1118). If the result is not a big hit (step Y1118; N), the process proceeds to step Y1120. When the result is a big hit (step Y1118; Y), the big hit information is set in the pending hit information (step Y1119), the pending number counter is updated by -1 (step Y1120), and the process returns to step Y1115. .

  When Steps Y1115 to Y1120 are repeated and the hold count counter becomes 0 (Step Y1115; Y), the process proceeds to Step Y1121. When the jackpot information is set in the on-hold bonus information, a command including the information to that effect is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 generates a jackpot based on this information, so that the user is not away. Notification that it is impossible. In addition, when the big hit no hit information is set in the on-hold bonus information, a command including the information to that effect is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 uses the special figure 2 variable display game based on this information. A notification is made that there is no possibility of a big hit and that the person can leave the seat.

  It should be noted that although notification is made as to whether or not seating is possible at the start of the specific gaming state, it may be any time as long as the specific gaming state is in effect. Also, the message command for the break time is always transmitted regardless of the content of the on-hold information, but the command may be transmitted only when the on-hold information is either big hit information or big hit information. . You may make it perform only either the alert | report that the absence of a seat is possible, or the alert | report that a seat is impossible. Further, the notification that the user can leave the seat or the notification that the user cannot leave the seat may be terminated by performing for a predetermined time, or the second start memory as a target of the pre-reading process is used up. Or until a big hit occurs.

  Also, regardless of the above-described on-hold information determination process, the second start memory is also subjected to the special figure hold information determination process (see FIG. 41) at the time of occurrence in the same way as the first start memory, and the prefetch result is sent to the effect control device 300 It may be transmitted, and the production control device 300 may notify whether or not the user can leave the seat based on the prefetching result.

  Further, in order to make it possible to leave the seat in a specific game state, the game may be interrupted based on the player stopping the launch operation. FIG. 111 shows an example where the game is interrupted. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the game proceeds when the player is touching the operation unit 24 in the specific game state. Whether the operation unit 24 is touched can be determined by the game control device 100 by a touch switch signal from a touch sensor provided in the operation unit 24.

  When the player releases his hand from the operation unit 24 as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the game control device 100 continues the game for a predetermined time and the player keeps his hand off the operation unit 24. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the game is interrupted as shown in FIGS. 111 (c) and 111 (d). For example, the predetermined time is preferably a time during which a game ball fired immediately before releasing the hand is discharged from the game area 32.

  In the period in which the game is interrupted, the display device 41 is notified that the game is interrupted, and the frame decoration device 18 having a lamp or LED is also blinked to indicate that the game is interrupted. As for the voice, the voice during the game is continuously output and the voice is not output indicating that it has been interrupted, but it may be indicated that the voice is also interrupted, or it may be interrupted for a certain time or longer. If it is, it may be indicated that it is interrupted by voice.

  The interruption of the game is continued while the player releases his hand from the operation unit 24. Thereafter, when the player touches the operation unit 24 as shown in FIG. 111 (e), the game control device 100 resumes the game. Thereby, the display of the display device 41 is started from the display at the time when the display is interrupted, and the blinking of the frame decoration device 18 is also finished, so that a light emission mode corresponding to the game is obtained. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to leave the seat in a specific gaming state in which the period is defined by time. Note that the interruption may be performed in the same manner other than the specific gaming state.

  Note that the interruption function as shown in FIG. 111 is effective even in a gaming machine having a configuration different from the gaming machine having the configuration as in the above-described embodiment. For example, for the special figure 2 variable display game, similarly to the special figure 1 variable display game, it is possible to generate a second start memory for holding the start of the game up to a predetermined upper limit number. The game machine is configured such that the two-variable display game is not executed at the same time, and when both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, the second start memory is preferentially consumed. It is possible to exert an effect on a gaming machine in which the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is more advantageous to the player than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. In such a gaming machine, if the first start memory is digested when leaving the seat in a gaming state in which the second start memory frequently occurs, it is advantageous for the player in the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory. However, it is not necessary to digest the first start memory when leaving the seat by providing the above-mentioned interruption function, and a big hit that is not advantageous to the player occurs. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in order to make it possible to leave the seat in a specific game state, a condition device operation area is provided in the game area 32, and the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or the game ball flows into the specific area Alternatively, the special game state may be started based on the subsequent detection of the game ball in the condition device operation area. The detection signal of the game ball in the condition device operating region is input to the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 does not start the special game state until the signal is input from the condition device operating region. To do.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the game progression method.

  FIG. 112 shows a game board according to this modification. The game board 30 of this modification is not provided with the first distribution device 90 and the second distribution device 92. Further, a second start winning opening 49 is provided instead of the third starting winning opening 48. A plurality of game nails are arranged above the second start winning opening 49, and a part of the game ball flowing down diagonally to the lower left on the upper left of the second start winning opening 49 is secondly played by the game nails. The downward flow direction is changed to the right toward the start winning opening 49. A part of the game balls whose flow direction has been changed to the right toward the second start winning opening 49 wins the second starting winning opening 49, but those that have not won win the right and move downward. It flows down and flows into the out port 30a along the guide rail 31. That is, the winning rate to the second start winning opening 49 is not so high. The second start winning port 49 is provided with a start port 2 switch 37a for detecting a winning game ball. The start port 2 switch 37a is a switch provided in the normal variation winning device 37 in the first embodiment.

  The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an upper prize winning port operating switch in place of the starting port 2 switch 37a. The upper prize opening operation switch detects a game ball won in the normal variation prize winning device 37 and inputs a detection signal to the game control device 100. The first special variation winning device 38 is opened based on the detection of the game ball by the upper prize winning opening operation switch. That is, in the gaming machine of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened without passing through the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. Yes.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows the specifications of the gaming machine of this modification. There is no small hit in the gaming machine of this modification. In addition, as will be described later, the big hit due to the inflow to the specific area (V winning) occurs separately because it occurs regardless of the special figure 2 variable display game, but in this case, the big hit type is only 16R electric support once. It is. Others are the same as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 113 (b) shows the transition of the gaming state in the gaming machine of this modification. There is no small hit game state because there is no small hit. Also, the game method in the specific game state ST3 is different. First, the specific game state ST3 is the same as that of the first embodiment in that it continues until one special figure 1 variable display game ends. The special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as the special figure 1 variable display game, but the start timing is not a prize to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 but a prize to the second start winning opening 49.

  In the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is started when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is won, and the first special variable prize winning device 38 is released when the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. However, in this modified example, if the prize is entered in the normal variation winning device 37 (regardless of the special figure 2 variation display game), the first special variation winning device 38 is opened as an accessory game. Then, if a game ball flows into a specific area in this bonus game (V prize), it will be a big hit.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 114 is performed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this timer interruption process, an accessory game process (step X800) for performing a process related to the normal variation winning device 37 is performed.

[Function game processing]
FIG. 115 shows the accessory game process (step X800) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the bonus game process, the entire process related to the bonus game that opens the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled.

  In this bonus game process, first, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the detection of a game ball in a specific area is performed (step X801), an upper prize winning port switch monitoring process is performed (step X802), and a lower prize is awarded. The mouth switch monitoring process is performed (step X803). Thereafter, if the bonus game process timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X804).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory game processing timer is 0 (step X805). When the value of the bonus game process timer is not 0 (step X805; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the bonus game process is terminated. Further, when the value of the accessory game process timer is 0 (step X805; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the accessory game process number. A bonus game sequence branch table to be played is set in the register (step X806). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the accessory game process number is acquired using the table (step X807), and a subroutine call is made with the accessory game process number (step X808).

  If the bonus game process number is “0” in step X808, a bonus routine process (step X809) for setting a bonus game, setting effects, etc. is performed. In step X808, when the bonus game process number is “1”, information necessary for setting the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38 in the bonus game and performing the process during the opening of the upper prize winning opening. An upper prize winning opening pre-process (step X810) is performed. If the bonus game process number is “2” in step X808, the upper prize winning opening opening process (step X811) for setting information necessary for performing the upper prize winning ball remaining ball process is performed. . In step X808, if the bonus game process number is “3”, there is a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 to be discharged or an inflow to a specific area. For example, an upper prize winning ball remaining ball process (step X812) for performing a process related to the occurrence of a special game state is performed.

  If the bonus game process number is “4” in step X808, information necessary for setting the opening time of the big prize opening in the special game state, updating the number of times of opening, and processing during the opening of the big prize opening. A fanfare / interval process (step X813) for setting and the like is performed. In step X808, if the bonus game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, A lower large winning opening opening process (step X814) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

  In step X808, when the bonus game process number is “6”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening, Lower large winning opening remaining ball processing (step X815) for setting information necessary for performing the end processing is performed. In step X808, if the bonus game process number is “7”, a big hit end process (step X816) for setting information necessary for performing the regular bonus game process (step X809) is performed.

  Each process in the above-mentioned accessory game process is similar to each process in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. Hereinafter, the relationship between the special figure 1 game process or the special figure 2 game process and the accessory game process in this modification will be described.

  In the special figure 1 game process of this modification, the processes of steps Y101, Y102, Y111 to Y114 are not performed. Moreover, in the special figure 2 game process of this modification, the process of step Y131-Y134, Y143-Y149 is not performed. That is, in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process, only the process related to the execution of the special figure variation display game is performed, and the process for the special game state is performed in steps X813 to X816 in the accessory game process. In addition, the processes in steps Y143 to Y145, which are the processes related to the small hit game state performed in the special figure 2 game process, are performed in the bonus game process as the processes related to the bonus game.

  Therefore, in the special figure 1 display processing (see FIG. 71), the process of setting 3 as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y766) is set as the process of setting 0 as the special figure 1 game process number, A process of setting 4 as the game process number is performed. Similarly, in the special figure 2 display processing (see FIG. 72), the process of setting 3 as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y826) is set as the process of setting 0 as the special figure 2 game process number. A process of setting 4 as an accessory game process number is performed.

  In the specific area switch monitoring process (step X803), the process shown in FIG. 116 is performed instead of the process shown in FIG. In this specific area switch monitoring process, the determination as to whether a small hit is being made (step Y171) is the determination as to whether the top prize winning port is in operation (step X817). The fact that the upper prize winning opening is in operation means that the upper prize winning opening open process (step X802) or the upper prize winning opening remaining ball process (step X803) is being executed.

  That is, in the first embodiment, instead of opening the first special variation winning device 38 due to the occurrence of a small hit, in the present modified example, the first special variation as a bonus game based on winning in the normal variation winning device 37. This is in accordance with the winning device 38 being opened. Therefore, what is performed for the small hit in each of the other processes is replaced with what is performed for the accessory game.

  The upper prize winning port switch monitoring process (step X804) is the process shown in FIG. Among these, the process for clearing the special figure 2 game process timer to 0 (step Y186) is the process for clearing the accessory game process timer to 0. Also, the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (step X802) is the process shown in FIG. Among these, regarding the process of clearing the target special figure game process timer to 0 (step Y169), in the case of the accessory game process, the process of clearing the accessory game process timer to 0 is performed.

  The regular object processing is the processing shown in FIG. In this routine, it is first determined whether or not there is an upper prize winning operation flag (step X821). The upper-award winning opening operation flag is a flag that is set when a game ball wins the first special variable winning device 38. If there is no upper prize opening operation flag (step X821; N), that is, if there is no prize in the first special variable prize-winning device 38, the routine processing for an accessory is ended.

  If there is an upper prize winning opening flag (step X821; Y), that is, if the first special variable prize winning device 38 has been awarded, the upper prize winning opening flag is cleared (step X821), and the upper prize winning is achieved. Mouth opening pre-process transition setting processing (step X823) is performed, and the accessory normal processing is terminated.

  The upper university winning opening opening pre-process transition setting process (step X823) is the same as the process shown in FIG. In this process, first, “1” relating to the pre-opening process for the upper prize winning opening is set as the process number, and the process number is saved in the bonus game process number area. Next, the time before opening the top prize winning opening (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the bonus game processing timer area, and a signal related to the start of the bonus game is saved in the test signal output data area. Thereafter, in order to set the action in the accessory game, the action number in the accessory game is saved in the control number in the solenoid control area, and the initial value is saved in the table pointer in the solenoid control area. Further, the control timer in the solenoid control area is cleared to 0, and the upper prize winning opening pre-process transition setting process is terminated.

  Also, the pre-opening process for the upper prize winning opening (step X810) is a process corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (see FIG. 76), and the same process is performed. Further, the upper large winning opening opening process (step X811) is a process corresponding to the small hit opening process (see FIG. 77), and the same process is performed. The upper prize winning ball remaining ball process (step X812) is a process corresponding to the small hit remaining ball process (see FIG. 78), and the same process is performed. Also, the fanfare / interval process (step X813), the lower big prize winning release process (step X814), the lower big prize winning port remaining ball process (step X815), and the big hit end process (step X816) are shown in FIGS. 79 to 85, respectively. It is the process shown.

  In these processes, when the next process number is set as the process number, the corresponding process number in the accessory game process is set, and the number is saved in the accessory game process number area. . Further, the process for setting the time in the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer is a process for setting the time in the accessory game processing timer.

  In the big hit end process (see FIG. 83), after setting 0 as the process number (step Y1050), it is not determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1051), and the bonus game process Save the process number in the number area. Then, the processes of Y1054 to Y1062 are performed.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Also, instead of the general power winning switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 98, the general power winning switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 118 is performed. In this general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations ( Step Z121). If it is during the normal game (step Z121; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning port operating switch for detecting the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 (step Z601). If it is determined that there is an input to the mouth operation switch (step Z601; Y), the value of the operation end is saved in the control pointer area during the normal drawing (step Z125).

  Then, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (step Z126), the upper prize winning opening operation flag is set (step Z602), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, when one game ball is won, the hit end value is saved in the normal process hitting process control pointer area so that the hit state of the normal figure ends in the middle.

  Further, when it is determined in step Z121 that it is not hitting the normal map (step Z121; N), or when it is determined in step Z601 that there is no input to the upper prize winning port operation switch (step Z601; N), Ends the power-on winning switch monitoring process.

  In the gaming machine of the present modification having the above-described configuration, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened based on the passing of the game ball to the normal start gate 34 by making a right turn in a specific gaming state, and the normal variation When a game ball wins the winning device 37, a bonus game is started and the first special variable winning device 38 is released. And if a game ball flows into a specific area in this bonus game, a V big hit is made and a special game state is set. Although the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are played as the special figure fluctuation display game, only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game may be played.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the third modified example described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured such that the specific game state is completed by executing a predetermined number of special figure change display games, and the change time of the special figure change display game executed in the specific game state is set to a predetermined condition. It is set based on.

  In the gaming machine of the present modification, the second start memory for holding the start of the game can be generated up to a predetermined upper limit number for the special figure 2 variable display game as well as the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, the gaming machine of the present modification is configured so that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not executed simultaneously. Further, when there are both the first start memory and the second start memory, the second start memory is preferentially digested. That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In other words, the game control device 100 displays a variation display game based on the second start memory when the second start storage means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, and a variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game is provided.

  For the special figure fluctuation display game executed in the specific gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (for example, 15 seconds) is made shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (for example, 60 seconds). When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed more frequently, the period of the specific game state becomes longer, and the possibility of generating a V jackpot in the bonus game is increased, which is advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 119 shows an execution mode of the special figure variation display game in a specific gaming state in the gaming machine of this modification. Here, a case where the specific game state is completed by executing the four special figure variation display games will be described.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a case where the four special figure variation display games executed in the fixed game state are all special figure 1 variation display games. In this case, the specific gaming state period (t111 to t112) is the shortest. FIG. 119 (b) shows a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed once. In this case, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is long, the specific game state period (t111 to t113) is longer than the specific game state period (t111 to t112) in the case of FIG. 119 (a). Become. FIG. 119 (c) shows a case where all of the four special figure fluctuation display games executed in the fixed gaming state are special figure 2 fluctuation display games. In this case, the specific gaming state period (t111 to t114) is the longest.

  In this way, as the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game increases, the period of the specific game state becomes longer, which is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game in the specific game state. For example, in the specific gaming state after the big hit in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state (first specific gaming state), since the second start memory is 0, the period of the specific gaming state is short In a specific gaming state (a specific gaming state per continuous) after a big hit in a specific gaming state and a special gaming state, there is a high possibility that a plurality of second start memories are stored. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the period of the specific gaming state will be long. Therefore, by clearing the barrier of acquiring a big hit in the first specific gaming state with a short period, it is possible to have a game characteristic that it becomes easy to win consecutively thereafter. Further, even if there is no second start memory, if the second start memory is generated, it is digested in preference to the first start memory, so that the period of the specific gaming state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to have a new game property that expects the occurrence of the second start memory.

  Although the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is made shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it may be reversed. In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game each have a single variation time, but each may be selected from a plurality of variation times. Further, instead of giving a difference to the variation time, a difference may be given to the stop time for displaying the result.

  Also, in the specific gaming state after the big hit in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state (the first specific gaming state), since the second start memory is 0, the period of the specific gaming state is short Although the possibility of becoming high becomes high, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 1 fluctuation display game in such a specific game state per first may be set to a long time. This long time is a time when the specific gaming state is started and the second starting memory can be generated. If the second starting memory can be generated at this timing, the period of the specific gaming state becomes long, And increase the chances of winning a big hit. The first special figure 1 fluctuation display game may be made longer for all of the first specific game states, or the first special figure 1 fluctuation display game depending on conditions such as a separate lottery or special result type. It may be determined whether or not the fluctuation time is long.

  From the above, in a gaming machine including a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down and a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a start prize that allows a game ball to win in the game area 32 A normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device 38, and a second special that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won. A variable prize device 39, a first special variable prize device 38 having a specific area into which a game ball can flow, and a game control means (game control device 100) for playing the game ball to the start prize port A first start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing various random number values extracted based on winning a prize as a first start memory that has a right to execute the first variable display game up to a predetermined number; Extraction based on establishment of start condition The second starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the various random number values as the second starting storage that has the right to execute the second variable display game up to a predetermined number, and the first starting storage First variation display game execution means (game control device 100) for executing the first variation display game based on the second change display game execution means (game control) for executing the second variation display game based on the second start memory. Device 100) and the second start-up memory means has a second start-up memory, the second variation display game based on the second start-up memory is more effective than the first variation display game based on the first start-up memory. Priority control means (game control device 100) that executes preferentially, and normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) that controls the normal variation winning device 37 to be converted to an open state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , First special variable winning device control means (game control device 100) capable of converting the first special variable winning device 38 to an open state based on the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 37, and at least a first variable display game If the result of is a special result, or the game ball won in the first special variable winning device 38 flows into the specific area, a special gaming state is generated that converts the second special variable winning device 39 into an open state. A special game state generating means (game control device 100) that controls the game, and a specific game state in which the normal variation winning device 37 can be opened after the special game state is ended. And a specific game state control means (game control device 100) that can be controlled to be set over a predetermined period until the total value of the number of executions of the second variable display game reaches a predetermined value. The execution time of the second variation display game set by the second variation display game execution means is longer than the execution time of the first variation display game set by the first variation display game execution means in the specific gaming state. It will be like that. Therefore, the length of the period of the specific game state can be changed to change the possibility that the special game state is generated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 32 gaming area 36 first start winning opening (start winning opening)
37 Normal variation winning device 38 First special variation winning device 39 Second special variation winning device 100 Game control device (game control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine comprising a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and a game control means for controlling the game,
In the gaming area,
Start prize opening where game balls can win,
An ordinary variable winning device, a first special variable winning device, and a second special variable winning device that are convertible between a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won,
The normal variation winning device is arranged at a position where a winning can be achieved by firing a game ball to the right of the gaming area,
The first special variation winning device includes a specific area into which a game ball can flow,
The game control means includes
A first start storage means capable of storing a random number value extracted based on winning in the start winning opening as a first start memory that has a right to execute the first variable display game up to a predetermined number;
A second starting storage means capable of storing a random number value extracted based on winning in the normal variable winning device as a second starting memory that has a right to execute a second variable display game up to a predetermined number;
First variation display game execution means for executing the first variation display game based on the first start memory;
Second variation display game execution means for executing the second variation display game based on the second start memory;
A normal variation for controlling the normal variation winning device to be converted to an open state when a third variation display game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the third variation display game is a predetermined result. Winning device control means;
First special variable winning device control means capable of converting the first special variable winning device into an open state when at least the result of the second variable display game is a specific result;
At least when the result of the first variation display game is a special result or when a game ball that has won the first special variation winning device flows into the specific area, the second special variation winning device is opened. Special game state generating means for controlling to generate a special game state to be converted into,
After the special gaming state is finished, it is possible to control to set a specific gaming state that can open the normal variation winning device over a predetermined period,
Controlling the specific gaming state to start based on the end of the special gaming state, and to end based on the end of the first variable display game that is first started after the end of the special gaming state;
The result of the second variable display game executed on the basis of the second start-up memory does not include an outage ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined result is not included in a result of the third variable display game which is started at a time other than the specific gaming state .